TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION INFINITIPRECAUTIONS TM-9 < PRECAUTION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006053760 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation after Battery Disconnect INFOID:0000000006053761 NOTE: • Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the push-button ignition switch to the LOCK position, then disconnect both battery cables. • After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both battery cables. • Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results. For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be turned. If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation procedure below before starting the repair operation. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect both battery cables. NOTE: Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged. 2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position. (At this time, the steering lock will be released.) 3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables disconnected and the steering wheel can be turned. 4. Perform the necessary repair operation. 5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn the push-button ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.) 6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III. TM-10 < PRECAUTION > [6MT: FS6R96A] PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000006053762 When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. Precaution for Battery Service (for V9X Models) INFOID:0000000006059488 When disconnect the battery cable, pay attention to the following. • Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. • Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running. • Before disconnecting battery cables, turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 4 minutes. • After high-load driving, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 15 minutes to remove the battery cable. NOTE: Turbocharger cooling pump may operate in a few minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. General Precautions INFOID:0000000006053796 CAUTION: • Never reuse drained gear oil. • Check the oil level or replace oil with vehicle on level ground. • During removal or installation, keep inside of transmission clear of dust or dirt. • Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required, be certain they never interfere with the function of the parts they are applied. • In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tightening sequence is specified, observe it. • Never damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces. PIIB3706J SEF289H PREPARATION TM-11 < PREPARATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000006053764 Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000006053765 Tool number Tool name Description KV32103600 Drift a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. b: 27 mm (1.06 in) dia. c: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. d: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia. Installing front oil seal JPDIC0798ZZ Tool name Description Drift a: Approx. 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 45 - 50 mm (1.77 - 1.97 in) dia. c: More than 220 mm (8.66 in) Installing front oil seal S-NT117 TM-12 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: FS6R96A] COMPONENT PARTS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000006053766 BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH 1 : Back-up lamp switch JPDIC0782ZZ 1 : Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch JPDIC0783ZZ STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-13 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Synchronizer Mechanism INFOID:0000000006053767 DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER The 4th, 3rd, and reverse gears are equipped with a double-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the control lever. TRIPLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER The 1st and 2nd gears are equipped with a triple-cone synchronizer to reduce the operating force of the control lever. TM-14 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R96A] BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006053768 1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect back-up lamp switch connector. Refer to TM-28, "Removal and Installation". 2. Check continuity between back-up lamp switch terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace back-up lamp switch. Refer to TM-28, "Removal and Installation". Terminal Condition Continuity 1 2 Reverse gear position Existed Except reverse gear position Not existed PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH TM-15 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Component Inspection INFOID:0000000006053769 1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH 1. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector. Refer to TM-29, "Removal and Installation". 2. Check continuity between park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer to TM-29, "Removal and Installation". Terminal Condition Continuity 1 2 Neutral position Existed Except neutral position Not existed TM-16 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [6MT: FS6R96A] NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000006053770 Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. NOTE: When transmission inner parts are malfunctioning, replace transmission assembly. SUSPECTED PARTS (Possible cause) OIL (Oil level is low) OIL (Wrong oil) OIL (Oil level is high) GASKET (Damaged) FRONT OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged) SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn) CHECK PLUG RETURN SPRING AND CHECK BALL (Worn or damaged) SHIFT FORK (Worn) GEAR (Worn or damaged) BEARING (Worn or damaged) BAULK RING (Worn or damaged) INSERT SPRING (Damaged) Reference TM-17 TM-17 TM-36 TM-24 Refer to NOTE. Symptoms Noise 1 2 3 3 Oil leakage 3 1 2 2 Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 2 2 Jumps out of gear 1 1 2 2 GEAR OIL TM-17 < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P PERIODIC MAINTENANCE GEAR OIL Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053771 Inspection INFOID:0000000006053772 OIL LEAKAGE Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from transmission or around it. OIL LEVEL 1. Remove filler plug (with gasket) (1) from transmission assembly. 2. Check the oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Never start engine while checking oil level. 3. Install filler plug (with gasket) to transmission assembly. CAUTION: Never reuse filler plug (with gasket). 4. Tighten filler plug (with gasket) to the specified torque. Draining INFOID:0000000006053773 1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up transmission. 2. Stop the engine. 1. Transmission assembly 2. Drain plug (with gasket) 3. Filler plug (with gasket) Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure. JPDIC0803GB JPDIC0749ZZ TM-18 < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [6MT: FS6R96A] GEAR OIL 3. Remove drain plug (with gasket) (1) from transmission assembly and then drain gear oil. 4. Install drain plug (with gasket) to transmission assembly. CAUTION: Never reuse drain plug (with gasket). 5. Tighten drain plug (with gasket) to the specified torque. Refilling INFOID:0000000006053774 1. Remove filler plug (with gasket) (1) from transmission assembly. 2. Fill with new gear oil to transmission as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Never reuse drained gear oil. 3. After refilling gear oil, check the oil level. Refer to TM-17, "Inspection". 4. Install filler plug (with gasket) to transmission assembly. CAUTION: Never reuse filler plug (with gasket). 5. Tighten filler plug (with gasket) to the specified torque. JPDIC0748ZZ Oil grade and viscosity : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity : Refer to TM-38, "General Specification". JPDIC0749ZZ SHIFT CONTROL TM-19 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION SHIFT CONTROL Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053775 JPDIC0769GB TM-20 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] SHIFT CONTROL Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053776 REMOVAL 1. Shift the control lever to neutral position. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-131, "Removal and Installation". 3. Set a suitable jack to the transmission assembly. CAUTION: When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the wire harness. 4. Remove rear engine mounting member mounting bolts. Refer to EM. 5. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the snap ring can be removed. CAUTION: The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping. 6. Remove snap ring (1), plane washers, and spring washer from control rod. CAUTION: Never lose snap ring, plane washer, and spring washer. 7. Remove control rod from control lever. CAUTION: Never lose control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing RH. 8. Remove control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing RH from control lever. CAUTION: Never lose control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing RH. 9. Remove control lever boot C from control lever. 10. Install rear engine mounting member mounting bolts. Refer to EM. 11. Remove shift knob with the following procedure. a. Release pawls on console boot. Refer to IP-43, "M/T MODELS : Removal and Installation". 1. Shift knob 2. Insulator 3. Seat 4. Console boot 5. Felt 6. Hole cover 7. Control lever boot A 8. Hole insulator 9. Control lever 10. Control lever boot B 11. Guide plate 12. Control lever spring 13. Control lever housing 14. Holder bracket 15. Control lever boot C 16. Bracket pin 17. Outer bushing 18. Inner bushing 19. Snap ring 20. Plane washer 21. Spring washer 22. Control rod bushing RH 23. Control rod bushing LH 24. Control rod 25. Holder rubber 26. Control link 27. Control pin 28. Snap ring 29. Transmission assembly 30. Striking rod : Apply grease, Multemp AC-J (Kyodo Yushi make) or DOW CORNING TORAY SH33L GREASE (Dow Corning Toray make) or an equivalent. : Apply Thread Locking Sealant, Loctite 242 or an equivalent. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. JPDIC0781ZZ SHIFT CONTROL TM-21 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P b. Lift console boot and then set suitable pliers to control lever ( ). CAUTION: Put waste cloth (A) between a suitable pliers and control lever to avoid damaging control lever. c. Set suitable pliers to shift knob. CAUTION: Put waste cloth (A) between a suitable pliers and shift knob to avoid damaging shift knob. d. Keeping control lever in place with a suitable pliers, loosen shift knob with a suitable pliers. NOTE: Remove shift knob from control lever keeping a suitable pliers in place because a certain power to turn shift knob is still necessary even after adhesive is peeled. e. Remove shift knob from control lever. f. Remove insulator from shift knob. 12. Remove seat from control lever. CAUTION: Never lose seat. 13. Remove console finisher assembly and center console assembly. Refer to IP-43, "M/T MODELS : Removal and Installation". 14. Remove felt. 15. Remove harness clips from hole cover. 16. Remove hole cover, control lever boot A, and hole insulator. 17. Remove control lever boot B (1) from control lever housing as shown in the figure. 18. Remove guide plate mounting bolts while holding guide plate. 19. Remove control lever and control lever spring from control lever housing. INSTALLATION 1. Apply recommended grease to sliding surface of control lever (1). 2. Install control lever spring and control lever to control lever housing. 3. Temporarily tighten guide plate mounting bolts while holding guide plate. 4. Install snap ring with the following procedure. a. Set a suitable jack to the transmission assembly. CAUTION: When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the wire harness. JPDIC0746ZZ JPDIC0747ZZ JPDIC0763ZZ JPDIC0796ZZ TM-22 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] SHIFT CONTROL b. Remove rear engine mounting member mounting bolts. Refer to EM. c. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the snap ring can be installed. CAUTION: The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping. d. Install control lever boot C (1) to control lever. CAUTION: • Fit control lever boot C to the groove on control lever housing. • Never allow control lever boot C and the area (A) of control lever overlap one another. e. Apply recommended grease to sliding surface of control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing RH. f. Install control rod bushing LH (1) and control rod bushing RH (2) to control lever (3). CAUTION: • Be careful with the orientation of control lever ( ). • Never lose control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing RH. g. Install control rod to control lever while holding control rod bushing RH. CAUTION: Never lose control rod bushing LH and control rod bushing RH. h. Install plane washers (1) and spring washer (2) to control rod. CAUTION: Never lose plane washer and spring washer. i. Seat snap ring (1) in the groove on control rod. CAUTION: • Never lose snap ring. • Check that snap ring is securely seated in the groove on control rod. • Avoid tangling control lever boot C. j. Install rear engine mounting member mounting bolts. Refer to EM. k. Install rear propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-131, "Removal and Installation". 5. Install guide plate with the following procedure. JPDIC0768ZZ Region Control rod bushing identification mark LH White RH Black : Vehicle front JPDIC0775ZZ JPDIC0776ZZ JPDIC0781ZZ SHIFT CONTROL TM-23 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P a. Shift the control lever to 1st gear position (A). b. Lightly shift control lever to the reverse gear direction until it stops, and keep control lever in this position. c. Set guide plate so that guide plate portion (B) contacts control lever portion (C). d. Temporarily tighten mounting bolt (D). e. Shift the control lever to 2nd gear position (A). f. Lightly shift control lever to the reverse gear direction until it stops, and keep control lever in this position. g. Set guide plate so that guide plate portion (B) contacts control lever portion (C). h. Tighten mounting bolt (D) to the specified torque. i. Tighten mounting bolts (E) and (F) to the specified torque. 6. Install control lever boot B (1) to guide plate (2). CAUTION: Check that groove of control lever boot B is engaged to guide plate. 7. Install hole insulator and control lever boot A. CAUTION: Be careful with the orientation of hole insulator and control lever boot A. JPDIC0766ZZ JPDIC0767ZZ 3 : Control lever JPDIC0764ZZ TM-24 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] SHIFT CONTROL 8. Install hole cover and then tighten hole cover mounting bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Be careful with the orientation of hole cover. 9. Install harness clips to hole cover. 10. Install felt. 11. Install center console assembly and console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-43, "M/T MODELS : Removal and Installation". 12. Install seat (1) and insulator (2) to control lever (3). CAUTION: • Be careful with the orientation of seat. • Never lose seat. 13. Apply thread locking sealant to control lever threads and then install shift knob to control lever. • Use Thread Locking Sealant, Loctite 242 or an equivalent. CAUTION: Remove the remaining adhesive on control lever and shift knob threads. 14. Set shift knob in the correct position with the following procedure. a. When tightening shift knob, if shift knob comes to the proper position within 1/2 turn from the position at which resistance begins to be felt, tighten it 1 more turn to set it in the proper position. b. If it takes more than 1/2 turn from the position at which resistance begins to be felt, tighten it to set it in the proper position. CAUTION: • Never adjust shift knob with loosing. • After adjusting to the proper position, until 30 minutes pass, never operate the shift knob intensely such as screwing or turning shift knob to opposite direction since a locking sealant becomes stiff. Inspection INFOID:0000000006053777 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Control Lever • When control lever is shifted to each gear position, check that there is no interference or boot disengagement. • When control lever is shifted to each gear position, check that there is no binding, noise, or backlash that disturbs shifting. • When control lever is shifted to the 1st or 2nd gear position by being pressed in the left side direction without being pressed downward, check that there is no binding or poor gear engagement. • When control lever is shifted to the 1st-2nd side and released, check that control lever returns smoothly to the neutral position. • When control lever is shifted to the 5th-6th side and released, check that control lever returns smoothly to the neutral position. : Vehicle front A : Proper position B : Start position on reaction force JPDIC0627ZZ JPDIC0010ZZ SHIFT CONTROL TM-25 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • When control lever is in a position other than the reverse gear position, check that control lever can be pressed downward. • When control lever is pressed and held downward, check that control lever can be shifted to the reverse gear position. • When control lever is shifted from the reverse gear position to the neutral position, check that control lever returns smoothly to the neutral position with spring power. • When control lever is not pressed downward, check that control lever cannot be shifted to the reverse gear position. Shift Knob Check that there is no shift knob dislocation. Boot Check that there is no damage, twist, or dislocation of boot. TM-26 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] AIR BREATHER HOSE AIR BREATHER HOSE Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053797 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053798 REMOVAL Refer to TM-26, "Exploded View" for removal procedure of air breather tube and air breather hose. INSTALLATION Note the following, and refer to TM-26, "Exploded View" for installation procedure of air breather tube and air breather hose. CAUTION: • Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or winding when installing it. • Be sure to insert air breather hose into air breather tube until hose end reaches the radius curve end. 1. Air breather tube 2. Air breather hose 3. Air breather 4. Transmission assembly Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure. JPDIC0756GB JPDIC0469ZZ AIR BREATHER HOSE TM-27 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • Install the air breather hose to the air breather, positioning the hose end ( ) as shown in the figure. JPDIC0806ZZ TM-28 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053780 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053781 REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Disconnect back-up lamp switch connector. 3. Remove back-up lamp switch (1) from transmission assembly. INSTALLATION 1. Temporarily tighten back-up lamp switch onto transmission assembly by rotating once or twice. CAUTION: Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads. 2. Apply recommended sealant to threads of back-up lamp switch as shown in the figure. • Use Genuine Liquid Gasket, Loctite 574 or an equivalent. 3. Tighten back-up lamp switch to the specified torque. 4. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of removal. 1. Back-up lamp switch : Apply Genuine Liquid Gasket, Loctite 574 or an equivalent. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. JPDIC0770GB : Vehicle front JPDIC0754ZZ JPDIC0526ZZ PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH TM-29 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053782 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053783 REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove bracket (1) from transmission assembly. 3. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector. 4. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch and plunger from transmission assembly. INSTALLATION 1. Install plunger to transmission assembly. CAUTION: Be careful with orientation of plunger. 1. Plunger 2. Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch : Apply Genuine Liquid Gasket, Loctite 574 or an equivalent. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. JPDIC0771GB : Vehicle front JPDIC0779ZZ : Vehicle front JPDIC0780ZZ TM-30 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH 2. Temporarily tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch onto transmission assembly by rotating once or twice. CAUTION: Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads. 3. Apply recommended sealant to threads of park/neutral position (PNP) switch as shown in the figure. • Use Genuine Liquid Gasket, Loctite 574 or an equivalent. 4. Tighten park/neutral position (PNP) switch to the specified torque. 5. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of removal. JPDIC0526ZZ TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY TM-31 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053799 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053800 REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-131, "Removal and Installation". 3. Remove control lever and holder bracket. Refer to TM-20, "Removal and Installation". 4. Remove front propeller shaft assembly mounting bolts, and then temporarily fasten it on transmission assembly with a rope. Refer to DLN-118, "V9X : Removal and Installation". 5. Remove dust cover. 6. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EM. 7. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-17, "Removal and Installation". 8. Remove brackets (1) and operating cylinder (2) and then temporarily secure it to a position where it will not inhibit work. Refer to CL-24, "Removal and Installation" and CL-27, "LHD : Removal and Installation". CAUTION: Never depress clutch pedal during removal procedure. 9. Remove crankshaft position sensor. Refer to EM. 10. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-31, "V9X : Removal and Installation". 11. Disconnect back-up lamp switch connector. 12. Set a suitable jack to the transmission assembly. CAUTION: When setting a suitable jack, be careful so that it does not contact with the wire harness. NOTE: 1. Transmission assembly 2. Dust cover : Refer to "INSTALLATION" in TM-31, "Removal and Installation" for the locations and tightening torque. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. JPDIC0761GB : Vehicle front JPDIC0762ZZ TM-32 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY By placing wooden block between oil pan (upper) and front suspension member, the removal of transmission assembly from engine becomes easier. 13. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to EM. 14. Remove engine and transmission mounting bolts. 15. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the top transmission mounting bolts can be removed. CAUTION: The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping. 16. Lower a suitable jack to the position where the park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector can be disconnect. Then disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch connector. CAUTION: The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping. 17. Remove harness and harness brackets and then temporarily secure it to a position where it will not inhibit work. 18. Remove transmission assembly from the engine. CAUTION: • Secure transmission assembly to a suitable jack while removing it. • The transmission assembly must not interfere with the catalyst. • The transmission assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch piping. • The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping. • The main drive gear must not interfere with the clutch cover. 19. Remove transfer assembly. Refer to DLN-70, "V9X (M/T) : Removal and Installation". 20. Remove air breather tube and air breather hose. Refer to TM-26, "Removal and Installation". 21. Remove withdrawal lever assembly, release bearing assembly, dust cover, ball pin, and washer. Refer to CL-30, "Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Secure transmission assembly to a suitable jack while installing it. • The transmission assembly must not interfere with the catalyst. • The transmission assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch piping. • The transmission assembly must not interfere with the high pressure piping and low pressure piping. • The main drive gear must not interfere with the clutch cover. • Apply recommended grease to the holder bracket contact surface of control lever housing. Refer to TM-34, "Removal and Installation". • Tighten transmission assembly mounting bolts to the specified torque. The figure is the view from the vehicle forward. • If flywheel is removed, align dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel. Refer to EM. Inspection INFOID:0000000006053786 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check the operation of the shift control. Refer to TM-24, "Inspection". • Check the oil leakage and the oil level. Refer to TM-17, "Inspection". Bolt symbol A B Insertion direction Transmission to engine Number of bolts 6 3 Bolt length “ ” mm (in) 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 35 (3.6, 26) JPDIC0759ZZ CONTROL ROD TM-33 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P CONTROL ROD Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053787 1. Shift knob 2. Insulator 3. Seat 4. Console boot 5. Felt 6. Hole cover 7. Control lever boot A 8. Hole insulator 9. Control lever JPDIC0769GB TM-34 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] CONTROL ROD Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053788 REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to TM-31, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove control lever housing with the following procedure. a. Remove bracket pins from transmission assembly. b. Remove control lever housing from transmission assembly. c. Remove outer bushings and inner bushings from control lever housing. 3. Remove control rod with the following procedure. a. Remove snap ring and control pin from control link. b. Remove control link from striking rod. c. Remove control link mounting bolt, washer, control link, and control link mounting nut from control rod. d. Remove holder rubbers from control link. INSTALLATION 1. Install control rod with the following procedure. a. Apply recommended grease to sliding surface of holder rubbers. b. Install holder rubbers to control link. c. Install control link mounting bolt, washer, control link, and control link mounting nut to control rod. CAUTION: Never reuse control link. d. Tighten control link mounting bolt to the specified torque. e. Tighten control link mounting nut to the specified torque. f. Install control link to striking rod. g. Install control pin (1) to control link (2). h. Slide snap ring (3) in the direction shown by arrow to install to the groove of control link. 2. Install control lever housing with the following procedure. 10. Control lever boot B 11. Guide plate 12. Control lever spring 13. Control lever housing 14. Holder bracket 15. Control lever boot C 16. Bracket pin 17. Outer bushing 18. Inner bushing 19. Snap ring 20. Plane washer 21. Spring washer 22. Control rod bushing RH 23. Control rod bushing LH 24. Control rod 25. Holder rubber 26. Control link 27. Control pin 28. Snap ring 29. Transmission assembly 30. Striking rod : Apply grease, Multemp AC-J (Kyodo Yushi make) or DOW CORNING TORAY SH33L GREASE (Dow Corning Toray make) or an equivalent. : Apply Thread Locking Sealant, Loctite 242 or an equivalent. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. : Front JPDIC0773ZZ CONTROL ROD TM-35 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P a. Install inner bushings (1) and outer bushings (2) according to the direction shown by arrow. CAUTION: • Never leave space around the flange of each bushing. • Never allow inner bushing rim to become folded inward/ outward. b. Install control lever housing to transmission assembly. c. Apply recommended grease to sliding surface of bracket pins. d. Seat the bracket pins (1) in the groove on transmission assembly. e. Apply recommended grease to the holder bracket contact surface of control lever housing. 3. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of removal. Inspection INFOID:0000000006053789 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check the operation of the shift control. Refer to TM-24, "Inspection". JPDIC0774ZZ : Front JPDIC0765ZZ TM-36 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] FRONT OIL SEAL FRONT OIL SEAL Exploded View INFOID:0000000006053801 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053802 REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to TM-31, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove front cover from transmission assembly. 3. Remove front oil seal from transmission assembly using a flat-bladed screwdriver. CAUTION: Never damage transmission assembly. INSTALLATION 1. Apply gear oil to the lip of front oil seal. 2. Install front oil seal (1) to transmission assembly using the drift [SST: KV32103600] and a drift [Commercial service tool]. CAUTION: Never incline front oil seal. 3. Install front cover to transmission assembly. CAUTION: Remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to both mating surfaces. 4. Tighten front cover mounting bolts to the specified torque. 5. For the next step and after, install in the reverse order of removal. Inspection INFOID:0000000006053792 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check the oil leakage and the oil level. Refer to TM-17, "Inspection". 1. Front cover 2. Front oil seal : Apply gear oil. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. JPDIC0772GB Dimension “L” : 6.5 – 7 mm (0.256 – 0.28 in) JPDIC0753ZZ AIR BREATHER TM-37 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [6MT: FS6R96A] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P AIR BREATHER Exploded View INFOID:0000000006054227 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000006053794 REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to TM-31, "Removal and Installation". 2. Remove air breather from transmission assembly. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Never reuse air breather. • Install air breather to transmission assembly within the angle (A) shown as follows. 1. Air breather tube 2. Air breather hose 3. Air breather 4. Transmission assembly Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure. JPDIC0756GB : Front A : 10° JPDIC0778ZZ TM-38 < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [6MT: FS6R96A] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification INFOID:0000000006053803 Transmission type FS6R96A Engine type V9X Axle type 4WD Number of speed 6 Shift pattern Synchromesh type Warner Gear ratio 1st 5.080 2nd 2.804 3rd 1.783 4th 1.260 5th 1.000 6th 0.835 Reverse 4.607 Number of teeth Main gear Drive 28 1st 43 2nd 42 3rd 36 4th 32 6th 25 Reverse 39 Counter gear Drive 43 1st 13 2nd 23 3rd 31 4th 39 6th 46 Reverse 13 Reverse idler gear 23 Oil capacity (Reference) (Imp pt) Approx. 1.6 (2-3/4) Remarks Reverse synchronizer Installed Double cone synchronizer 3rd, 4th, and reverse Triple cone synchronizer 1st and 2nd PCIB1769E PRECAUTIONS TM-39 < PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS FOR RUSSIA FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006134082 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. FOR RUSSIA : General Precautions INFOID:0000000006134081 • Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. PRECAUTIONS • Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS. If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work. • Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. after replacing the ATF. • Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. • Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. • Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission. • Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. • All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. • Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled. • It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. • The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. • Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. • Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease. • Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. • When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-123, "Changing". • Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehicle by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed. In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selector lever from “P” position to other positions. However, this symptom is not a malfunction witch results in the damage of parts. EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005450741 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) SAT652J PRECAUTIONS TM-41 < PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Battery Service (for V9X Models) INFOID:0000000006059566 When disconnect the battery cable, pay attention to the following. • Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. • Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running. • Before disconnecting battery cables, turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 4 minutes. • After high-load driving, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 15 minutes to remove the battery cable. NOTE: Turbocharger cooling pump may operate in a few minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : General Precautions INFOID:0000000004969721 • Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. • Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS. If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work. • Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. after replacing the ATF. • Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. • Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. • Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission. • Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. • All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. • Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled. • It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. • The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. • Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. • Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease. • Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. SEF289H SEF289H SAT652J TM-42 < PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] PRECAUTIONS • When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-123, "Changing". • Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehicle by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed. In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selector lever from “P” position to other positions. However, this symptom is not a malfunction witch results in the damage of parts. PREPARATION TM-43 < PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004969722 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Tool number Tool name Description 1. 315268E000* O-ring 2. 310811EA5A* Charging pipe A/T fluid changing and adjustment Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts JSDIA1332ZZ PBIC0190E TM-44 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] COMPONENT PARTS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS A/T CONTROL SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004969563 *1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly. *2: Except for Russia NOTE: 1. Selector lever position indicator 2. A/T shift selector assembly 3. A/T assembly connector 4. Control valve with TCM*1 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Manual mode indicator 7. Shift position indicator 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. G sensor*2 10. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 11. Paddle shifter (shift-up) A. Center console B. A/T assembly C. Accelerator pedal D. Combination meter E. Luggage floor RH F. Steering wheel JSDIA0922ZZ COMPONENT PARTS TM-45 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • The following components are included in A/T shift selector assembly (2). - Manual mode select switch - Manual mode position select switch - Shift position switch • The following components are included in control valve with TCM (4). - TCM - Input speed sensor 1, 2 - Output speed sensor - A/T fluid temperature sensor - Transmission range switch - Direct clutch solenoid valve - High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve - Input clutch solenoid valve - Front brake solenoid valve - Low brake solenoid valve - Anti-interlock solenoid valve - 2346 brake solenoid valve - Line pressure solenoid valve - Torque converter clutch solenoid valve A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000004969564 Name Function TCM TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM" Transmission range switch TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch" Output speed sensor TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor" Input speed sensor 1 TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor" Input speed sensor 2 A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor" Input clutch solenoid valve TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve" Front brake solenoid valve TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve" Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve" High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve" Low brake solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve" Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve" 2346 brake solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve" Line pressure solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve" Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve" Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor" Throttle position sensor Manual mode switch TM-47, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch" Paddle shifter TM-48, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter" G sensor* TM-48, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor" A/T CHECK indicator lamp When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. Starter relay STR-6, "A/T : System Description" Stop lamp switch TM-49, "A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description" ECM EC-37, "System Description" (VQ37VHR), EC-1125, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram" (V9X) BCM BCS-11, "System Description" TM-46 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] COMPONENT PARTS *: Except for Russia A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000005288362 • The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. • The TCM is integral with the control valve assembly and built into the A/T assembly. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000005288363 • The transmission range switch incorporates four contact switches. Each contact switch transmits an ON/ OFF signal to the TCM. • The TCM judges a select lever position from a combination of ON/OFF signals transmitted from each contact switch. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005288364 The output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is transmitted to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005288365 The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the A/ T. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000005288366 The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and transmits a signal to the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288367 • The Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The Input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288368 • The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. Unified meter and A/C amp. MWI-9, "METER SYSTEM : System Description" ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-24, "System Description" Yaw rate/side G sensor BRC-66, "Description" Name Function Select lever position Transmission range switch SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 P OFF OFF OFF OFF R ON OFF OFF ON N ON ON OFF OFF D and M ON ON ON ON COMPONENT PARTS TM-47 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288369 • The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288370 • The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high and low reverse clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288371 • The low brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The low brake solenoid valve controls the low brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288372 • Anti-interlock solenoid valve prevents the simultaneous activation of the input clutch and the low brake. • The anti-interlock solenoid valve is an ON/OFF type solenoid valve. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288373 • The 2346 brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The 2346 brake solenoid valve controls the 2346 brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288374 The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6 and M7 by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005288375 The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor INFOID:0000000005288376 • The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. • The accelerator pedal position sensor detects the accelerator position. • The accelerator pedal position sensor transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. Then, the TCM receives accelerator pedal position signal from the ECM via CAN communication. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000005288377 • The manual mode switch [mode select switch and position select switch (shift-up/shift-down)] is installed in the A/T shift selector assembly. • The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate side or manual shift gate side) of the selector lever and transmits a manual mode signal or a non-manual mode signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-manual mode signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. TM-48 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] COMPONENT PARTS • The position select switch (shift-up) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-up side of the manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift up signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode shift up signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. • The position select switch (shift-down) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-down side of the manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift down signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode shift down signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter INFOID:0000000005288378 When operating the paddle shifter (shift-up/shift-down), a paddle shifter shift up signal or paddle shifter shift down signal is transmitted to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a paddle shifter shift-up signal or a paddle shifter shift-down signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor INFOID:0000000005288379 • The G sensor detects the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle. • The G sensor converts the inclination angle and acceleration to the voltage signal and transmits it to ECM. The TCM calculates the voltage signal that is received from ECM via CAN communication line and judges the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Selector Lever Position Indicator INFOID:0000000005288380 Indicates selector lever position. A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004969595 1. Position pin 2. Shift lock unit 3. Shift lock solenoid 4. Slider A 5. Control device harness connector 6. Lock plate 7. Slider B 8. Shift lock relay*1 9. Stop lamp switch 10. Brake pedal 11. Shift lock cover *2 A. A/T shift selector assembly B. Engine room C. Brake pedal, upper D. Center console JSDIA0915ZZ COMPONENT PARTS TM-49 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P *1: For Russia with ICC *2: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover. A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000004969596 *: For Russia with ICC Component Function Shift lock unit Shift lock solenoid Activated by the ignition switch and stop lamp signals, it holds the relative positions of sliders A and B. Lock plate Restricts position pin moving. Shift lock release button Pressing the shift lock release button cancels the shift lock forcibly. Position pin Links with selector knob button and restricts selector lever shift operation. Stop lamp switch For Russia with ICC • When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON. • When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock relay. Except for Russia without ICC • When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON. • When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock unit. Shift lock relay* Current flow to stop lamp switch allows shift lock relay contact ON, and then power is applied to shift lock unit. TM-50 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000004969589 1. Low brake 2. Reverse brake 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. 2nd one-way clutch 6.*1 Rear carrier 7. Mid carrier 8. Input clutch 9.*2 Front sun gear 10.*3 Front carrier 11. Under drive carrier 12. 1st one-way clutch 13. Front brake 14. 2346 brake 15.*4 Input shaft 16. Torque converter 17. Oil pump 18.*2 Under drive sun gear 19.*3 Under drive internal gear 20.*4 Front internal gear 21. Mid sun gear 22.*1 Mid internal gear 23. Rear sun gear 24. Rear internal gear 25. High and low reverse clutch hub 26. Control valve with TCM 27. Parking gear 28. Adapter case 29. Output shaft *1: 6 and 22 are one unit. *2: 9 and 18 are one unit. *3: 10 and 19 are one unit. *4: 15 and 20 are one unit. JSDIA0771ZZ STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-51 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P System Diagram INFOID:0000000004969590 System Description INFOID:0000000004969591 DESCRIPTION JSDIA0877GB TM-52 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION With the use of 4 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 7-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmission for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 4 sets of multiple-disc brakes and 2 sets of one-way clutches. CLUTCH AND BAND CHART POWER TRANSMISSION “N” Position JSDIA1402GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-53 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O Since the low brake is released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. P “P” Position JSDIA0880GB TM-54 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The same as for the “N” position, since the low brake is released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. • The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft mechanically. “D1” and “DS1” Positions JSDIA1277GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-55 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The 1st one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P • The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0866GB TM-56 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “M1” Position Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Deceleration from front internal gear Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition — Fixed Input/Output Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from under drive internal gear — Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-57 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P NOTE: The front brake operates only while coasting. • The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear. NOTE: The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. JSDIA0867GB TM-58 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D2” and “DS2” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Deceleration from front internal gear Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition — Fixed Input/Output Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from under drive internal gear — Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-59 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P • The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0868GB TM-60 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “M2” Position Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition Fixed — Input/Output Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from under drive internal gear Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-61 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P • The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear. NOTE: The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0869GB TM-62 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D3”, “DS3” and “M3” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition Fixed — Input/Output Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from under drive internal gear Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-63 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P • The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0870GB TM-64 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D4”, “DS4” and “M4” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition Fixed — Input/Output Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from under drive internal gear Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-65 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P • The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier. • The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0871GB TM-66 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D5”, “DS5” and “M5” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition Fixed — Input/Output Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from under drive internal gear Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-67 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. P • The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier. • The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0872GB TM-68 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D6”, “DS6” and “M6” Positions Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — input/Output — Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the rear carrier Same number of revolution as the input shaft Same number of revolution as the rear carrier Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-69 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P • The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. • The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0873GB TM-70 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Front planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D7”, “DS7” and “M7” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — Input/Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier Same number of revolution as the input shaft Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-71 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The under drive carrier is fixed by the front brake. P • The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. • The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear. • Each planetary gear enters state described below. JSDIA0874GB TM-72 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “R” Position Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Deceleration from front internal gear Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition — Fixed Input/Output Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from under drive internal gear — Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — Input/Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier Same number of revolution as the input shaft Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-73 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P NOTE: The front brake operates at the fixed speed or less. • The rear carrier and the mid internal gear are fixed by the reverse brake. • The mid sun gear rotates at the same speed as the rear sun gear by operation of the 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch. NOTE: The high and low reverse clutch operates at the fixed speed or less. JSDIA0875GB TM-74 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear Component Description INFOID:0000000004969593 Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Deceleration from front internal gear Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition — Fixed Input/Output Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from under drive internal gear — Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Output Fixed Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear internal gear — Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Input Output Fixed Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Counterclockwise revolution — Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the rear sun gear Deceleration from mid sun gear — Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the under drive carrier. Input clutch (I/C) Connects the input shaft, the mid internal gear and the rear carrier. Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear. High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear. Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier. Low brake (L/B) Fastens the mid sun gear. 2346 brake (2346/B) Fastens the under drive sun gear. 1st one-way clutch (1st OWC) Allows the under drive carrier to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation. 2nd one-way clutch (2nd OWC) Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation. Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft. Oil pump Driven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and each lubricating system. SYSTEM TM-75 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004969561 Except for Russia For Russia JSDIA1344GB JSDIA1537GB TM-76 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000004969562 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART *: Except for Russia SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. • Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors. • Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, etc. • Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005321612 TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd failsafe and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged. Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case, turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern. Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-118, "Diagnosis Flow". FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION Sensor (or signal) ⇒ TCM function ⇒ Actuator Transmission range switch Accelerator pedal position signal Closed throttle position signal Wide open throttle position signal Engine speed signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Output speed sensor Vehicle speed signal Manual mode switch signal Stop lamp switch signal Side G sensor signal Input speed sensor 1, 2 G sensor signal* Line pressure control (TM-80) Shift change control (TM-82) Shift pattern control (TM-86) Lock-up control (TM-88) Fail-safe control (TM-105) Self-diagnosis (TM-92) CONSULT-III communication line (TM-92) CAN communication line (TM-129) Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve A/T CHECK indicator lamp Back-up lamp relay Starter relay 1st Fail-Safe The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to 2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped. 2nd Fail-Safe The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunctioning parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured. Final Fail-Safe • Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving. • The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control. SYSTEM TM-77 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P DTC Vehicle condition Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled P0705 — • Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting can be performed) • 30 km/h (19MPH) or less • Lock-up is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Shift position indicator is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is disabled) • Back-up lamp is OFF • Large shift shock — • Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting can be performed) • 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less • Lock-up is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Shift position indicator is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is disabled) • Back-up lamp is OFF • Large shift shock P0710 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed Between • Manual mode is prohibited the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0717 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed Between • Manual mode is prohibited the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0720 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • Only downshift can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • A vehicle speed signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded as an effective signal — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited • A vehicle speed signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded as an effective signal — P0729 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P1734 Neutral malfunction between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 and 7 • Locks in 4GR • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral — • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited Other than the above • Driving with the gear ratio between 1GR and 2GR • Driving with the gear ratio between 2GR and 3GR • Locks in 3GR • Locks in 4GR • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited TM-78 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SYSTEM P0730 — • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P0740 — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited P0744 — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited P0750 P0775 P0795 P2713 P2722 P2731 P2807 — • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR • Manual mode is prohibited — • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P0780 — • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P1585 — Idle neutral control is prohibited — Idle neutral control is prohibited P1705 — • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited P1730 — • Neutral • Manual mode is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P1815 Paddle switch malfunction Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited Gate switch malfunction Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited Malfunction of both switches Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited U0300 U1000 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure • Manual mode is prohibited Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0720 and P1721 — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR DTC Vehicle condition Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe SYSTEM TM-79 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control INFOID:0000000005321613 The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured. The TCM has the following protection control. REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. 1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR. TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic substrate in TCM reaches the high temperature. LINE PRESSURE CONTROL Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Control at malfunction Neutral Normal return condition • Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less and • Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less Vehicle behavior • The torque transmission cannot be performed • There is a shock just before a vehicle stop Malfunction detection condition • Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR and • Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH) Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction Vehicle behavior Does not exist Malfunction detection condition TCM electronic substrate temperature • 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds or • 150°C (302°F) Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less Normal return condition • TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F) and • Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8 TM-80 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SYSTEM LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005310746 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005310747 • When an engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque) equivalent to the engine drive force is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve. This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving state. • The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the driving state. • In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure. Normal Control Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the engine drive force. Back-up Control (Engine Brake) When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed. During Shift Change JSDIA1345GB PCIA0008E PCIA0009E SYSTEM TM-81 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set. For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to engine torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic corresponds to engine speed, during engine brake operation. At Low Fluid Temperature When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed temperature, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic. SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL PCIA0010E PCIA0011E TM-82 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SYSTEM SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005310750 JSDIA1675GB SYSTEM TM-83 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005310751 Input/Output Signal Chart *: This signal is transmitted via communication line. The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic is attained. The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque information, etc. Shift Change System Diagram *1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil pressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio. BLIPPING CONTROL This system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolution according to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down. • “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions. Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed Shift change control • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • Input clutch solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Line pressure solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve Output speed sensor Vehicle speed A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature ECM Engine speed signal* Accelerator pedal position signal* Closed throttle position signal* Engine and A/T integrated control signal (Engine torque)* BCM Stop lamp switch signal* PCIA0012E PCIA0013E TM-84 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SYSTEM - When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression. - When downshifting by the manual mode. • TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression. • Engine speed control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”. • ECM synchronizes the engine speed according to the engine speed control demand signal. Downshifting by accelerator pedal depression Downshifting by the manual mode JSDIA0826GB JSDIA0815GB JSDIA0817GB SYSTEM TM-85 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL (EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA) Input/Output Signal Chart *1: This signal is transmitted via communication line. *2: V9X models The TCM activates low brake solenoid valve and controls the low brake oil pressure to the low pressure level if the driver does not intend to start the vehicle while the vehicle is being stopped in the “D” or “DS” position. Therefore, the low brake is in the release (slip) status and the power transmission route of A/T is the same status as the “N” position. This can decrease the engine load and improves the fuel economy because the drive force of engine is not transmitted to the output shaft of A/T. NOTE: During the cold engine starting, the idle speed is increased to activate the three way catalyst. (VQ37VHR models) Idle Neutral Control Start Condition Idle neutral control starts when all of the following conditions are satisfied. However, the control ends when any one of the following conditions becomes insufficient during idle neutral control. *: V9X models NOTE: The idle neutral control is terminated or prohibited when the TCM and ECM detect that the vehicle is in any of the conditions as per the following. • Engine cooling water temperature and A/T fluid temperature are below or above a prescribed temperature. • A/T malfunction occurs. • DTC is detected. • Fail-safe mode activates. • Idle neutral control is performed continuously for a certain period of time. Sensor Signal Each sensor, switch and TCM function Actuator control unit ⇒ TCM TCM ⇒ ECM ECM ⇒ TCM Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed N idle instruction signal (Standby signal)* 1 N idle instruction signal (Start signal)* 1 Idle neutral control Low brake solenoid valve Output speed sensor Output shaft revolution A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature Transmission range switch Selector lever position ECM Engine speed signal*1 Accelerator pedal position signal*1 Throttle position signal*1 G sensor signal*1 BCM Stop lamp switch signal*1 Turn indicator signal*1, *2 ABS actuator electric unit (control unit) Pressure sensor signal*1 Unified meter and A/C amp. Vehicle speed signal*1 Driving location : Level road and gentle slope Selector lever position : “D” and “DS” position Vehicle speed : 0 km/h (0 MPH) Accelerator pedal opening : 0.0 / 8 Brake pedal : Depress Engine speed : Idle speed Turn signal lamp and hazard warning lamp* : OFF TM-86 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SYSTEM Idle Neutral Control Resume Condition Idle neutral control can be resumed when its start condition is fulfilled after any of the following operations is performed (unless a malfunction occurs in the vehicle). • After driving at more than a prescribed speed. • After shifting the selector lever to any other position than “D” or “DS” position, and then shifting to “D” or “DS” position again. (VQ37VHR models) • When idle neutral control start conditions are fulfilled for a certain period of time. SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005310752 SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005310753 It automatically selects the shift pattern (such as road environment and driving style) suitable for the various situations so as to allow the vehicle to be driven efficiently and smoothly. ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) JSDIA1426GB SYSTEM TM-87 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Input/Output Signal Chart *: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line. • When driving on an up/down slope ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed. Fixing at 4GR, 5GR or 6GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum driving force. On a down-slope, automatic shift-down to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR controls to gain optimum engine brake. • When driving on a curve TCM receives the side G sensor signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). It locks to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR position in moderate cornering or to 3GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This prevents any upshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel. DS Mode • Changes to the shift schedule that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone when ASC is active. • DS mode can be switched according to the following method. - When the selector lever is in the “D” position, shifting the selector lever to manual shift gate enables switching to DS mode. - When in DS mode, shifting the selector lever to the main shift gate enables to cancel DS mode. - After switching to manual mode with paddle shifter, switching to DS mode can not be enabled even when the selector lever is shifted to the manual shift gate. MANUAL MODE SYSTEM Input/Output Signal Chart *: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line. • The TCM receives the manual mode signal, non-manual mode signal, manual mode shift up signal, manual mode shift down signal, paddle shifter shift up signal and paddle shifter shift down signal from unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication line. The TCM shifts shift pattern control to the manual mode based on these signals, and then shifts the A/T by operating each solenoid valve according to the shift operation of the driver. NOTE: When paddle shifter is pulled and held for approximately 60 seconds, gear shift using paddle shifter becomes inoperative. “P1815” is displayed in “self-diagnosis results” of CONSULT-III. In this case, paddle shifter returns to normal status when ignition switch is turned OFF once and then ON again. Gear shift using paddle shifter becomes operative. • The TCM prohibits the manual mode while being in fail-safe mode due to an A/T malfunction, etc. Refer to TM-105, "Fail-Safe". • The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. if the TCM refuses the transmission from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever or paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side. The unified meter and A/C amp. blinks shift indicator on the combination meter and sounds the buzzer to indicate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this signal. However, the TCM does not transmit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the following. - When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “DOWN (− side)” side while driving in 1GR. - When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)” side while driving in 7GR. LOCK-UP CONTROL LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005310754 Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator Output speed sensor Vehicle speed Manual mode • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • Input clutch solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Line pressure solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature ECM Engine speed signal* Accelerator pedal position signal* Unified meter and A/C amp. Manual mode signal* Non-manual mode signal* Manual mode shift up signal* Manual mode shift down signal* Paddle shifter shift up signal* Paddle shifter shift down signal* Manual mode shift refusal signal* JSDIA1350GB SYSTEM TM-89 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005310755 • The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. • Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. • The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases the torque converter clutch piston. Lock-up Operation Condition Table Lock-up released • In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained. in this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled. Lock-up Applied • In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled. Smooth Lock-up Control When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque converter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock. Half-clutched State • The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the torque converter clutch solenoid pressure. In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into half-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is completed smoothly. Slip Lock-up Control • In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed. This raises the fuel efficiency for 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR and 7GR. A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000004969594 • Shift lock prevents an unintentional start of the vehicle that may be caused by an incorrect operation while selector lever is in the “P” position. • Selector lever can be shifted from the “P” position to another position when the following conditions are satisfied. - Ignition switch ON - Stop lamp switch is ON (brake pedal is depressed) JSDIA0847GB Selector lever “D” position “M” position Gear position 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 Lock-up × – – – – – × × × × × × Slip lock-up × × × × × × × × × × × × TM-90 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SYSTEM - Selector lever knob button is pressed SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT “P” POSITION When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Shift Operation Allowed) The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is not energized if the brake pedal is not depressed while the ignition switch is ON. The lock plate (B) lowers according to the downward movement of the position pin (C) when the selector button (D) is pressed, and presses only slider B (E) into the shift lock unit. Slider A (F) located below the lock plate prevents the downward movement of the lock plate with the spring force. The selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” position for this reason. However, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit, allowing the selector lever to shift if the shift lock release button is pressed. When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed) The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is energized and the relative positions of sliders A (B) and B (C) are maintained when the brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is ON. The lock plate (D) lowers according to the downward movement of the position pin (E), thrusting away sliders A and B, when the selector button (F) is pressed. The position pin lowers to the position that allows shift operation for this reason. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted out of the P position. OPERATION AT OTHER THAN “P” POSITION The shift lock function will not operate at any position other than “P” because the lock plate (A) is only set for the “P” position. Accordingly, the selector lever can be shifted to any position regardless of the brake operation. The position pin (B) enters the “P” position thrusting away the lock plate when the selector lever is shifted to the “P” position. Then, the shift mechanism is locked when the selector button (C) is released. “P” POSITION RETAINING MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK) When ignition switch is not in the ON position, power is not applied to the shift lock solenoid in the shift lock unit. This causes shift lock state, and then “P” position is retained. When an actuating system in the shift lock unit has a malfunction, selector lever is unable to operate from the “P” position even when pressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON. However, when pressing the shift lock release button, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit. This allows shift lock to be released and selector lever enables the select operation from the “P” position. CAUTION: Never use the shift lock release button except when the select lever is inoperative even when pressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON. JSDIA0119ZZ JSDIA0120ZZ JSDIA0121ZZ ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM TM-91 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000005320775 The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD) performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MI (malfunction indicator) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory and in the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to TM-109, "DTC Index". OBD FUNCTION The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MI (malfunction indicator) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MI automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. For details, refer to EC-134, "Diagnosis Description". TM-92 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000004969598 CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMS *: Although “Function Test” and “Special Function” are selectable, do not use its. WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index". IGN Counter The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD) and indicates the number of times that the ignition switch is turned ON after returning to the normal state from DTC. • CAN malfunction - The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. - The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. - The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. • Other than CAN malfunction - The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. - The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...254 → 255 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. - The number is fixed to255 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 255. DATA MONITOR X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option Diagnostic test mode Function Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately. Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items. Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time. CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram. CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor It monitors the starts of CAN communication. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system. Function Test* This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For engine, more practical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available. Special Function* Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed. Item name Description G SENSOR CALIBRATION Calibrates G sensor. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the TCM from the output shaft revolution. ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) X — Displays the vehicle speed signal received via CAN communication. OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X Displays the output speed calculated from the pulse signal of output speed sensor. DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) TM-93 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X Displays the input speed calculated from front sun gear revolution and front carrier revolution. F SUN GR REV (rpm) — — Displays the front sun gear revolution calculated from the pulse signal of input speed sensor 1. F CARR GR REV (rpm) — — Displays the front carrier gear revolution calculated from the pulse signal of input speed sensor 2. ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X Displays the engine speed received via CAN communication. TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X Displays the revolution difference between input speed and engine speed. ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — Displays the accelerator position estimated value received via CAN communication. THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X Displays the throttle position received via CAN communication. ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) X X Displays the ATF temperature of oil pan calculated from the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor. ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) X X Displays the ATF temperature estimated value of torque converter outlet calculated from the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor. ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) — — Displays the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor. BATTERY VOLT (V) X — Displays the power supply voltage of TCM. LINE PRES SOL (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid. TCC SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid. L/B SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the low brake solenoid. FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the front brake solenoid. HLR/C SOL (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the high and low reverse clutch solenoid. I/C SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the input clutch solenoid. D/C SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the direct clutch solenoid. 2346/B SOL (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the 2346 brake solenoid. L/P SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid, and displays the monitor value. TCC SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor value. L/B SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the low brake solenoid, and displays the monitor value. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM TM-94 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) FR/B SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the front brake solenoid, and displays the monitor value. HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the high and low reverse clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor value. I/C SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the input clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor value. D/C SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the direct clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor value. 2346/B SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the 2346 brake solenoid, and displays the monitor value. GEAR RATIO — X Displays the gear ratio calculated from input speed and output speed. ENGINE TORQUE (Nm) — — Displays the engine torque estimated value received via CAN communication. ENG TORQUE D (Nm) — — Displays the engine torque estimated value reflected the requested torque of each control unit received via CAN communication. INPUT TRQ S (Nm) — — Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. INPUT TRQ L/P (Nm) — — Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure calculation process of line pressure control. TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of lock-up control. TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRGT PRES L/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of low brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of front brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of input clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) TM-95 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of direct clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRG PRE 2346/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of 2346 brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. SHIFT PATTERN — — Displays the gear change data using the shift pattern control. VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — — Displays the vehicle speed for control using the control of TCM. G SEN SLOPE* (%) X — Displays the inclination angle calculated by the G sensor signal received via CAN communication. RANGE SW 4 (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 4. RANGE SW 3 (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 3. RANGE SW 2 (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 2. RANGE SW 1 (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 1. SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of paddle shifter (down switch). SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of paddle shifter (up switch). DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of selector lever (down switch). UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of selector lever (up switch). NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X — Displays whether the selector lever is in any position other than manual shift gate position. MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X — Displays whether the selector lever is in the manual shift gate position. TOW MODE SW (ON/OFF) — — • Displays the reception status of tow mode signal received via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. DS RANGE (ON/OFF) — — Displays whether it is the DS mode. 1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X — • Displays the reception status of 1 position switch signal received via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X — • Displays the reception status of overdrive control switch signal received via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. BRAKESW (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of stop lamp switch signal received via CAN communication. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM TM-96 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X — • Displays the reception status of POWER mode signal received via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of ASCD OD cancel request signal received via CAN communication. ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of ASCD operation signal received via CAN communication. ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of ABS operation signal received via CAN communication. TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of TCS gear keep request signal received via CAN communication. TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF) X — Displays whether the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal received via CAN communication is “cold”. TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON/OFF) X — Displays whether the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal received via CAN communication is “warm”. LOW/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of low brake. HC/IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of high and low reversed clutch, input clutch or front brake. IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of input clutch or front brake. HLR/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of high and low reversed clutch. W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X — Displays the kickdown condition signal status received via CAN communication. CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X — Displays the idling status signal status received via CAN communication. DRV CST JUDGE (DRIVE/COAST) — — Displays the judgment results of “driving” or “coasting” judged by TCM. SHIFT IND SIGNAL — — Displays the transmission value of shift position signal transmitted via CAN communication. STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — — Displays the command status from TCM to starter relay. F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — — Displays the transmission status of A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal transmitted via CAN communication. ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — — • Displays the transmission status of ATF temperature signal transmitted via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) TM-97 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P *: Except for Russia DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — — Displays the transmission status of manual mode signal transmitted via CAN communication. ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — — Monitors the command value from TCM to the anti-interlock solenoid, and displays the monitor status. START RLY MON (ON/OFF) — — Monitors the command value from TCM to the starter relay, and displays the monitor status. ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — — Displays the command status from TCM to anti-interlock solenoid. SLCT LVR POSI — X Displays the shift positions recognized by TCM. GEAR — X Displays the current transmission gear position recognized by TCM. NEXT GR POSI — — Displays the target gear position of gear change that is calculated based on the vehicle speed information and throttle information. SHIFT MODE — — Displays the transmission driving mode recognized by TCM. D/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of direct clutch. FR/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of front brake. 2346/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of 2346 brake. 2346B/DC PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of 2346 brake or direct clutch. N IDLE STATUS* (ON/OFF) — — Displays the control status of idle neutral control. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM TM-98 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) Item Description Check item 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 Following items for “1GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Reverse brake • Each clutch • Hydraulic control circuit 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 Following items for “2GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 Following items for “3GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 Following items for “4GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 5TH GR FNCTN P0735 Following items for “5GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 6TH GR FNCTN P0729 Following items for “6GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 7TH GR FNCTN P1734 Following items for “7GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK Following items for “TCC solenoid function” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Harness or connectors • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Torque converter • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit TCM TM-99 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION TCM Reference Value INFOID:0000000004969713 VALUES ON DIAGNOSIS TOOL NOTE: 1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts in accordance with the specified diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (that implies gear position) on CONSULT-III may slightly differ from that is described in Service Manual. This occurs because of the reason as per the following: - Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance - Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start - Gear position displayed on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifts are completed 3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving Approximately equals the speedometer reading. ESTM VSP SIG During driving Approximately equals the speedometer reading. OUTPUT REV During driving (lock-up ON) Tachometer / Gear ratio INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately equals the engine speed. F SUN GR REV During driving Revolution of front sun gear is indicated. F CARR GR REV During driving Revolution of front carrier is indicated. ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely equals the tachometer reading. TC SLIP SPEED During driving Engine speed − Input speed ACCELE POSI Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8 Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8 THROTTLE POSI Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8 Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8 ATF TEMP 1 Ignition switch ON Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is indicated. ATF TEMP 2 Ignition switch ON Temperature of ATF at the exit of torque converter. ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 V – 14 V) LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A TCC SOLENOID Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A Lock-up is active 0.8 A Other than the above 0 A L/B SOLENOID Low brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Low brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A TM-100 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] TCM FR/B SOLENOID Front brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Front brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A HLR/C SOL High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A I/C SOLENOID Input clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Input clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A D/C SOLENOID Direct clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Direct clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A 2346/B SOL 2346 brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A 2346 brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A L/P SOL MON During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A TCC SOL MON Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A Lock-up is active 0.8 A Other than the above 0 A L/B SOL MON Low brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Low brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A FR/B SOL MON Front brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Front brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A HLR/C SOL MON High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A I/C SOL MON Input clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Input clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A D/C SOL MON Direct clutch is disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Direct clutch is engaged 0 – 0.05 A 2346/B SOL MON 2346 brake is engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A 2346 brake is disengaged 0 – 0.05 A GEAR RATIO Driving with 1GR 4.924 Driving with 2GR 3.194 Driving with 3GR 2.043 Driving with 4GR 1.412 Driving with 5GR 1.000 Driving with 6GR 0.862 Driving with 7GR 0.772 ENGINE TORQUE During driving Changes the value according to the acceleration or deceleration. ENG TORQUE D During driving Changes the value according to the acceleration or deceleration. INPUT TRQ S During driving Changes the value according to the acceleration or deceleration. INPUT TRQ L/P During driving Changes the value according to the acceleration or deceleration. TRGT PRES L/P Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions 490 kPa Other than the above 490 – 1370 kPa TRGT PRES TCC Slip lock-up is active 0 – 600 kPa Lock-up is active 600 kPa Other than the above 0 kPa Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) TCM TM-101 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P TRGT PRES L/B Low brake is engaged 1370 kPa Low brake is disengaged 0 kPa TRGT PRES FR/B Front brake is engaged 1370 kPa Front brake is disengaged 0 kPa TRG PRE HLR/C High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa High and low reverse clutch is engaged 0 kPa TRGT PRES I/C Input clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa Input clutch is engaged 0 kPa TRGT PRES D/C Direct clutch is disengaged 1370 kPa Direct clutch is engaged 0 kPa TRG PRE 2346/B 2346 brake is engaged 1370 kPa 2346 brake is disengaged 0 kPa SHIFT PATTERN During normal driving (without shift changes) FF VEHICLE SPEED During driving Approximately equals the speedometer reading. G SEN SLOPE*1 Level road 0% Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%) Downhill slope Negative value (minimum −40.45%) RANGE SW 4 Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions OFF Other than the above ON RANGE SW 3 Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions OFF Other than the above ON RANGE SW 2 Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions OFF Other than the above ON RANGE SW 1 Selector lever in “P” position OFF Other than the above ON SFT DWN ST SW Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled to − side ON Other than the above OFF SFT UP ST SW Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled to + side ON Other than the above OFF DOWN SW LEVER Selector lever is shifted to − side ON Other than the above OFF UP SW LEVER Selector lever is shifted to + side ON Other than the above OFF NON M-MODE SW Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF Other than the above ON MANU MODE SW Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON Other than the above OFF TOW MODE SW*2 Tow mode ON Other than the above OFF DS RANGE Driving with DS mode ON Other than the above OFF 1 POSITION SW*2 Selector lever in “1” position ON Other than the above OFF Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) TM-102 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] TCM OD CONT SW*2 When overdrive control switch is depressed ON When overdrive control switch is released OFF BRAKESW Brake pedal is depressed ON Brake pedal is released OFF POWERSHIFT SW*2 Power mode ON Other than the above OFF ASCD-OD CUT When TCM receives ASCD OD cancel request signal ON Other than the above OFF ASCD-CRUISE ASCD operate ON Other than the above OFF ABS SIGNAL ABS operate ON Other than the above OFF TCS GR/P KEEP When TCM receives TCS gear keep request signal ON Other than the above OFF TCS SIGNAL 2 When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal is “cold” ON Other than the above OFF TCS SIGNAL 1 When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal is “warm” ON Other than the above OFF LOW/B PARTS At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL HC/IC/FRB PARTS At 1GR - 2GR - 3GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL IC/FRB PARTS At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL HLR/C PARTS At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL W/O THL POS Accelerator pedal is fully depressed ON Accelerator pedal is released OFF CLSD THL POS Accelerator pedal is released ON Accelerator pedal is fully depressed OFF DRV CST JUDGE Accelerator pedal is depressed DRIVE Accelerator pedal is released COAST Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) TCM TM-103 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SHIFT IND SIGNAL When the selector lever is positioned in between each position OFF Selector lever in “P” position P Selector lever in “R” position R Selector lever in “N” position N Selector lever in “D” position D Selector lever in “D” position: 7GR Selector lever in “D” position: 6GR 6 Selector lever in “D” position: 5GR 5 Selector lever in “D” position: 4GR 4 Selector lever in “D” position: 3GR 3 Selector lever in “D” position: 2GR 2 Selector lever in “D” position: 1GR 1 Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR M1 Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR M2 Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR M3 Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR M4 Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR M5 Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR M6 Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR M7 Driving with DS mode DS STARTER RELAY Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON Other than the above OFF F-SAFE IND/L For 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON ON Other than the above OFF ATF WARN LAMP*2 When TCM transmits the ATF indicator lamp signal ON Other than the above OFF MANU MODE IND Driving with manual mode ON Other than the above OFF ON OFF SOL MON Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON Driving with 1GR to 3GR Other than the above OFF START RLY MON Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON Other than the above OFF ON OFF SOL Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON Driving with 1GR to 3GR Other than the above OFF Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) TM-104 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] TCM *1: Except for Russia *2: Not mounted but always display as OFF. TERMINAL LAYOUT PHYSICAL VALUES SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P Selector lever in “R” position R Selector lever in “D” and “DS” positions D Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR 6 Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR 5 Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR 4 Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR 3 Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR 2 Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR 1 GEAR During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th NEXT GR POSI During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th SHIFT MODE Driving with the D position 0 or 3 Driving with the manual mode 4 or 8 D/C PARTS At 1GR - 2GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL FR/B PARTS At control fixed to 1GR FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL 2346/B PARTS At control fixed to 1GR FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL 2346B/DC PARTS At 2GR - 3GR - 4GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL N IDLE STATUS*1 Idle neutral control is active ON Other than the above OFF Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) SCIA1658E Terminal (Wire color) Description Condition Value (Approx.) + − Signal name Input/ Output 1 (Y) Ground Power supply Input Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF 0 V TCM TM-105 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P *1: VQ37VHR models *2: V9X models *3: LHD models *4: RHD models *5: RHD models with VQ37VHR *6: Except RHD models with VQ37VHR Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005321585 TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd failsafe and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged. Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case, turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern. Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-118, "Diagnosis Flow". FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION 2 (R)*1 (LG)*2 Ground Power supply (Memory back-up) Input Always Battery voltage 3 (L) — CAN-H Input/ Output — — 4 (V) — K-line (CONSULT-III signal) Input/ Output — — 5 (B) Ground Ground Output Always 0 V 6 (Y)*3 (G)*4 Ground Power supply Input Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF 0 V 7 (SB)*5 (R)*6 Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ON Selector lever in “R” position. 0 V Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage 8 (P) — CAN-L Input/ Output — — 9 (GR) Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. Battery voltage Selector lever in other positions. 0 V 10 (B) Ground Ground Output Always 0 V Terminal (Wire color) Description Condition Value (Approx.) + − Signal name Input/ Output 1st Fail-Safe The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to 2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped. 2nd Fail-Safe The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunctioning parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured. Final Fail-Safe • Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving. • The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control. TM-106 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] TCM DTC Vehicle condition Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled P0705 — • Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting can be performed) • 30 km/h (19MPH) or less • Lock-up is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Shift position indicator is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is disabled) • Back-up lamp is OFF • Large shift shock — • Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting can be performed) • 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less • Lock-up is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Shift position indicator is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is disabled) • Back-up lamp is OFF • Large shift shock P0710 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed Between • Manual mode is prohibited the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0717 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed Between • Manual mode is prohibited the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0720 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • Only downshift can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • A vehicle speed signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded as an effective signal — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited • A vehicle speed signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded as an effective signal — P0729 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P1734 Neutral malfunction between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 and 7 • Locks in 4GR • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral — • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited Other than the above • Driving with the gear ratio between 1GR and 2GR • Driving with the gear ratio between 2GR and 3GR • Locks in 3GR • Locks in 4GR • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited TCM TM-107 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0730 — • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P0740 — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited P0744 — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited P0750 P0775 P0795 P2713 P2722 P2731 P2807 — • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR • Manual mode is prohibited — • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P0780 — • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P1585 — Idle neutral control is prohibited — Idle neutral control is prohibited P1705 — • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited P1730 — • Neutral • Manual mode is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P1815 Paddle switch malfunction Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited Gate switch malfunction Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited Malfunction of both switches Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited U0300 U1000 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure • Manual mode is prohibited Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0720 and P1721 — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR DTC Vehicle condition Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe TM-108 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] TCM Protection Control INFOID:0000000005321586 The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured. The TCM has the following protection control. REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. 1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR. TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic substrate in TCM reaches the high temperature. DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000005321587 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per the following list. Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Control at malfunction Neutral Normal return condition • Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less and • Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less Vehicle behavior • The torque transmission cannot be performed • There is a shock just before a vehicle stop Malfunction detection condition • Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR and • Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH) Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction Vehicle behavior Does not exist Malfunction detection condition TCM electronic substrate temperature • 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds or • 150°C (302°F) Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less Normal return condition • TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F) and • Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8 Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference 1 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-129 TCM TM-109 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P DTC Index INFOID:0000000005321588 NOTE: • If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per the following list. Refer to TM-108, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart". • The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD). Refer to TM-92, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)". 2 P0615 STARTER RELAY TM-130 P0705 T/M RANGE SWITCH A TM-132 P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-133 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-135 P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-136 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-153 P0745 PC SOLENOID A TM-155 P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A TM-156 P0775 PC SOLENOID B TM-157 P0795 PC SOLENOID C TM-159 P2713 PC SOLENOID D TM-176 P2722 PC SOLENOID E TM-177 P2731 PC SOLENOID F TM-178 P2807 PC SOLENOID G TM-179 3 P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-140 P0730 INCORRECT GR RATIO TM-142 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-143 P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-145 P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-147 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-149 P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-151 P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-154 P0780 SHIFT TM-158 P1730 INTERLOCK TM-167 P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-169 4 U0300 CAN COMM DATA TM-128 P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-138 P1585 G SENSOR TM-160 P1705 TP SENSOR TM-164 P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TM-165 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-171 Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) DTC*2 MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- Reference SULT-III or GST CONSULT-III only “TRANSMISSION” STARTER RELAY — P0615 TM-130 T/M RANGE SWITCH A P0705 P0705 TM-132 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 P0710 TM-133 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 P0717 TM-135 TM-110 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] TCM *1: Refer to TM-91, "Diagnosis Description". *2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5. OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 TM-136 ENGINE SPEED — P0725 TM-138 6GR INCORRECT RATIO P0729 P0729 TM-140 INCORRECT GR RATIO P0730 P0730 TM-142 1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 P0731 TM-143 2GR INCORRECT RATIO P0732 P0732 TM-145 3GR INCORRECT RATIO P0733 P0733 TM-147 4GR INCORRECT RATIO P0734 P0734 TM-149 5GR INCORRECT RATIO P0735 P0735 TM-151 TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 P0740 TM-153 TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 P0744 TM-154 PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 TM-155 SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 P0750 TM-156 PC SOLENOID B P0775 P0775 TM-157 SHIFT P0780 P0780 TM-158 PC SOLENOID C P0795 P0795 TM-159 G SENSOR — P1585 TM-160 TP SENSOR — P1705 TM-164 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 TM-165 INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 TM-167 7GR INCORRECT RATIO P1734 P1734 TM-169 M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 TM-171 PC SOLENOID D P2713 P2713 TM-176 PC SOLENOID E P2722 P2722 TM-177 PC SOLENOID F P2731 P2731 TM-178 PC SOLENOID G P2807 P2807 TM-179 CAN COMM DATA — U0300 TM-128 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 TM-129 Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) DTC*2 MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- Reference SULT-III or GST CONSULT-III only “TRANSMISSION” A/T CONTROL SYSTEM TM-111 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P WIRING DIAGRAM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM LHD LHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000004969714 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". VQ37VHR MODELS TM-112 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] A/T CONTROL SYSTEM V9X MODELS JCDWM1015GB A/T CONTROL SYSTEM TM-113 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O RHD P RHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005288356 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". VQ37VHR MODELS JCDWM1019GB TM-114 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] A/T CONTROL SYSTEM V9X MODELS JCDWM1016GB A/T CONTROL SYSTEM TM-115 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P JCDWM1020GB TM-116 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000004969703 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC JCDWM1021GB A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-117 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC JCDWM1022GB TM-118 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Flow INFOID:0000000004969555 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM 1. Refer to TM-119, "Question sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings in the vehicle. 2. Check the following: - Service history - Harnesses and connectors malfunction. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC 1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists. 2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations. - Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out the data CONSULT-III and affix it to the Work Order Sheet.) - Erase DTCs. - Check the relationship between the cause that is clarified with DTC and the malfunction information described by the customer. TM-197, "Symptom Table" is effective. 3. Check the information of related service bulletins and others also. Do malfunction information and DTC exist? Malfunction information and DTC exists. >>GO TO 3. Malfunction information exists, but no DTC. >>GO TO 4. No malfunction information, but DTC exists. >>GO TO 5. 3.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Check any malfunction described by a customer, except those with DTC on the vehicle. Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-105, "Fail-Safe". When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-119, "Question sheet". Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer occurs. >> GO TO 5. 4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle. Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-105, "Fail-Safe". When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-119, "Question sheet". Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer occurs. >> GO TO 6. 5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again. Refer to TM-108, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the order for performing the diagnosis. NOTE: If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data. Is any DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 7. DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW TM-119 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P NO >> Check according to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". 6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM” Use TM-197, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start performing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms. >> GO TO 8. 7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts. Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary. >> GO TO 8. 8.FINAL CHECK Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed. Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer, referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4. Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced? YES-1 >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 5. YES-2 >> Malfunction symptom is reproduced: GO TO 6. NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased. Question sheet INFOID:0000000004969556 DESCRIPTION There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions properly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved. In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. Therefore, it is important to understand the symptom and status well enough by asking the customer about the concerns carefully. In order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the question sheet referring to the question points. WORKSHEET SAMPLE SEF907L Question Sheet Customer name MR/MS Engine # Manuf. Date Incident Date VIN Model & Year In Service Date Trans. Mileage Km / Mile TM-120 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Symptoms Vehicle does not move ( Any position Particular position ) No up shift ( 1GR → 2GR 2GR → 3GR 3GR → 4GR 4GR → 5GR 5GR → 6GR 6GR → 7GR) No down shift ( 7GR → 6GR 6GR → 5GR 5GR → 4GR 4GR → 3GR 3GR → 2GR 2GR → 1GR) Lock-up malfunction Shift point too high or too low Shift shock or slip Noise or vibration No kick down No pattern select Others Frequency All the time Under certain conditions Sometimes ( times a day) Weather conditions Not affected Weather Fine Clouding Raining Snowing Other ( ) Temp. Hot Warm Cool Cold Temp. [Approx. °C ( °F)] Humidity High Middle Low Transmission conditions Not affected Cold During warm-up After warm-up Engine speed ( rpm) Road conditions Not affected In town In suburbs Freeway Off road (Up / Down) Driving conditions Not affected At starting While idling While engine racing At racing While cruising While accelerating While decelerating While turning (Right / Left) Vehicle speed [ km/h ( MPH)] Other conditions Question Sheet ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY TM-121 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY Description INFOID:0000000004969557 G sensor calibration must be performed when replacing transmission assembly. Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004969558 1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE 1. Park the vehicle on a flat road. 2. Adjust pressure in all tires to the specified value. Refer to WT-84, "Tire Air Pressure". >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM CALIBRATION With CONSULT-III 1. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Touch “START”. CAUTION: • Never start the engine. • Never give any motion to the vehicle during the calibration. Is “completed” displayed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Perform the calibration again. 3.CHECK DTC With CONSULT-III Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1585” detected? YES >> Refer to TM-160, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Calibration end. TM-122 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] G SENSOR CALIBRATION G SENSOR CALIBRATION Description INFOID:0000000004969559 G sensor calibration must be performed when the following operation is performed. • Removal and installation or replacement of G sensor • Replacement of transmission assembly • Replacement of ECM Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004969560 1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE 1. Park the vehicle on a flat road. 2. Adjust pressure in all tires to the specified value. Refer to WT-84, "Tire Air Pressure". >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM CALIBRATION With CONSULT-III 1. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Touch “START”. CAUTION: • Never start the engine. • Never give any motion to the vehicle during the calibration. Is “completed” displayed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Perform the calibration again. 3.CHECK DTC With CONSULT-III Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1585” detected? YES >> Refer to TM-160, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Calibration end. A/T FLUID TM-123 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P A/T FLUID Changing INFOID:0000000005321666 CAUTION: • Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF. • Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty. • When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust. 1. Step 1 a. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe (310811EA5A) (B). 2. Step 2 a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less. b. Lift up the vehicle. c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF. d. When the ATF starts to drip, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan. NOTE: Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet. e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole. CAUTION: Tighten the charging pipe by hand. g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe. CAUTION: Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the charging pipe. h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF. i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe, and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan. CAUTION: Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from the oil pan. j. Lift down the vehicle. k. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes. l. Stop the engine. 3. Step 3 a. Repeat “Step 2”. 4. Final Step a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less. b. Lift up the vehicle. c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF. Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to TM-231, "General Specification". JSDIA1334ZZ JSDIA1335ZZ TM-124 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] A/T FLUID d. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the drain plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-210, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole. CAUTION: Tighten the charging pipe by hand. g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe. CAUTION: Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the charging pipe. h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF. i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe, and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan. CAUTION: Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from the oil pan. j. Lift down the vehicle. k. Start the engine. l. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F). NOTE: The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT-III. m. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake. n. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position. o. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and then remove the overflow plug from the oil pan. p. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM- 210, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never reuse overflow plug. Adjustment INFOID:0000000005321667 CAUTION: • Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF. • Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty. • When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust. • Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking with CONSULT-III when the ATF level adjustment is performed. 1. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe (310811EA5A) (B). 2. Start the engine. 3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F). NOTE: The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT-III. 4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake. 5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position. 6. Lift up the vehicle. JSDIA1335ZZ Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to TM-231, "General Specification". JSDIA1334ZZ A/T FLUID TM-125 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission. 8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. 9. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole. CAUTION: Tighten the charging pipe by hand. 10. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe. CAUTION: Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the charging pipe. 11. Fill approximately 0.5 liters (1/2 lmp qt) of the ATF. 12. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the charging pipe and the bucket pump hose. If the ATF does not leak, refill the ATF. 13. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-210, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". CAUTION: Never reuse overflow plug. JSDIA1335ZZ TM-126 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] STALL TEST STALL TEST Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000004969725 INSPECTION 1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. 2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary. 3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. 4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position. 5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake. 6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test. 7. Shift the selector lever to “N” position. 8. Cool down the ATF. CAUTION: Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute. 9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position. JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST O: Stall speed within standard value position H: Stall speed higher than standard value L: Stall speed lower than standard value Stall test standard value position Stall speed : Refer to TM-232, "Stall Speed". Selector lever position Possible location of malfunction “D” and “M” “R” Stall speed H O • Low brake • 1st one-way clutch • 2nd one-way clutch O H • Reverse brake • 1st one-way clutch • 2nd one-way clutch L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch H H • Line pressure low Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR Direct clutch slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR High and low reverse clutch slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR Input clutch slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 5 → 6 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 6 → 7 Slipping in 7GR Front brake slippage A/T POSITION TM-127 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P A/T POSITION Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969726 INSPECTION 1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). 2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. 3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and the A/T body. 5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly is shown in the figure. 6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position without applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check button operation for sticking. 7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in the “P” or “N” position. 8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P” position, engine can be started even when selector lever is moved forward and backward.) 9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position. 10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should be indicated on the combination meter. In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the manual mode. (Only while driving.) ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen nut ( ). 2. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position. 3. While pressing lower lever (A) toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position direction), tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Be careful not to touch the control rod while pressing lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly. NOTE: Press lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly with a force of approximately 1 kg (9.8 N). JSDIA0790GB JPDIA0885ZZ TM-128 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA Description INFOID:0000000005775068 The amount of data transmitted from each control unit is read. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005775069 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “U0300” detected? YES >> Go to TM-128, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005775070 1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT Check the number of control units replaced before detecting “U0300”. Is the number of replaced control units one? YES >> Since the replaced control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifications. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.INSPECTION CONTROL UNIT With CONSULT-III 1. Remove one of the replaced control units. 2. Install the previous control unit mounted before replacement. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “U0300” detected? YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch to check the other control units in the same method. NO >> Since the removed control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifications. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause U0300 Internal Control Module Software Incompatibility When the amount of data transmitted from each control unit is smaller than the specified amount. Control units other than TCM. U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-129 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000004969599 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969600 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. 3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Go to TM-129, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969601 Go to LAN-29, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause U1000 CAN Communication Line TCM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. • Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted.) • TCM TM-130 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0615 STARTER RELAY P0615 STARTER RELAY Description INFOID:0000000004969602 TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969603 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Shift the selector lever to “P” and “N” positions. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. 3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P0615” detected? YES >> Go to TM-130, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969604 1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to STR-12, "Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM (WITH GASOLINE ENGINE) -". NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0615 Starter Relay Circuit The starter monitor value is OFF when the ignition switch is ON at the “P” and “N” positions. • Harness or connectors (Starter relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted.) • Starter relay circuit IPDM E/R connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E5 30 Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions. Battery voltage Selector lever in other positions. 0 V P0615 STARTER RELAY TM-131 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 2) Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F51 9 E5 30 Existed A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal F51 9 Not existed TM-132 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969606 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ACCELE POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Shift the selector lever throughout the entire shift position from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each position for 2 seconds or more) 4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 5. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0705” detected? YES >> Go to TM-132, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969607 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected if... Possible cause P0705 Transmission Range Switch A Circuit (PRNDL Input) The TCM detects an ON/OFF combination pattern other than that of the transmission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4. (For ON/ OFF combination patterns of transmission range switches, refer to TM-46, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch".) • Harness or connectors (Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.) • Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8 VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A TM-133 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969609 DTC DETECTION LOGIC Except for Russia (VQ37VHR) For Russia (VQ37VHR) and Europe (V9X) DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0710 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor A Circuit The A/T fluid temperature sensor is −40 °C (−40 °F) or less for 5 seconds while driving the vehicle at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor The A/T fluid temperature sensor is 180 °C (356 °F) or more for 5 seconds. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is short.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor The fluid temperature sensor is in the following conditions while driving the vehicle at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is stuck.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor For 4 minutes : 15 °C – 20 °C (59 °F – 68 °F) : 10 °C – 15 °C (50 °F – 59 °F) : 5 °C – 10 °C (41 °F – 50 °F) : 0 °C – 5 °C (32 °F – 41 °F) For 7 minutes : −5 °C – 0 °C (23 °F – 32 °F) : −10 °C – −5 °C (14 °F – 23 °F) : −15 °C – −10 °C (5 °F – 14 °F) : −20 °C – −15 °C (−4 °F – 5 °F) For 14 minutes : −40 °C – −20 °C (−40 °F – −4 °F) DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0710 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor A Circuit TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is -40 °C (-40 °F) or less continuously for 5 seconds while driving at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is 180 °C (356 °F) or more continuously for 5 seconds. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is short.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor TCM judges the following conditions while driving the vehicle at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more: • The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by 1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 14 minutes when A/T fluid temperature is -20 °C (-4 °F) or less. • The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by 1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 7 minutes when A/T fluid temperature is between -19 °C (-2 °F) and 0 °C (32 °F). • The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by 1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 4 minutes when A/T fluid temperature is between 1 °C (34 °F) and 20 °C (68 °F). • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is stuck.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-134 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 14 minutes or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0710” detected? YES >> Go to TM-134, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969610 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SLCT LVR POSI : D VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-135 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969612 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “GEAR”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “W/O THL POS” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. CAUTION: Keep the same gear position. NOTE: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0717” detected? YES >> Go to TM-135, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969613 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0717 Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A Circuit No Signal The revolution of input speed sensor 1 and/or 2 is 270 rpm or less. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open.) • Input speed sensor 1 and/or 2 SLCT LVR POSI : D GEAR : 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) W/O THL POS : ON ENGINE SPEED : More than 1,500 rpm TM-136 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969615 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0720” detected? YES >> Go to TM-136, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969616 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0720 Output Speed Sensor Circuit • The vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor is 5 km/h (3MPH) or less when the vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/ C amp. to TCM is 20 km/h or more. (Only when starts after the ignition switch is turned ON.) • The vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM does not decrease despite the 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more of deceleration in vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor. when the vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor is 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more and the vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM is 24 (15 MPH) or more. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open.) • Output speed sensor ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-137 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TM-138 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0725 ENGINE SPEED P0725 ENGINE SPEED Description INFOID:0000000004969617 The engine speed signal is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM via CAN communication line. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969618 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P0725” detected? YES >> Go to TM-138, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969619 1.CHECK DTC OF ECM With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-487, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC OF TCM With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC other than “P0725” detected? YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index" (VQ37VHR), EC-1184, "DTC Index" (V9X). DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit • TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from the ECM. • The engine speed is more less 150 rpm even if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/ h (7 MPH). Harness or connectors (ECM to TCM circuit is open or shorted.) SLCT LVR POSI : D VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 10km/h (7 MPH) P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-139 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TM-140 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000004969620 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 6GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969621 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-141, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “6TH GR FNCTN P0729” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • VQ37VHR models - 0.913 or more - 0.811 or less • V9X models - 0.923 or more - 0.819 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-141 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0729” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 109, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0729” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-141, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0729” is detected)>>Go to TM-141, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969622 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO Description INFOID:0000000004969623 • TCM detects a high-rpm state of the under drive sun gear. • The number of revolutions of the under drive sun gear is calculated with the input speed sensor 1 and 2. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969624 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-142, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”. 3. Drive vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0730” detected? YES >> Go to TM-142, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969625 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0730 Incorrect Gear Ratio The revolution of under drive sun gear is 8,000 rpm or more. NOTE: Not detected when in “P” or “N” position and during a shift to “P” or “N” position. • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Input speed sensor 2 ENGINE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data. VEHICLE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data. B/FUEL SCHDL Same value as the Freeze Frame Data. P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-143 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000004969626 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969627 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-144, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0731 Gear 1 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • VQ37VHR models - 5.219 or more - 4.629 or less • V9X models - 5.069 or more - 4.496 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) TM-144 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0731” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 109, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0731” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-144, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0731” is detected)>>Go to TM-144, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969628 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 1st ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 1st Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-145 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000004969629 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 2GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969630 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-146, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0732 Gear 2 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • VQ37VHR models - 3.385 or more - 3.003 or less • VQ37VHR models - 3.289 or more - 2.917 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) TM-146 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0732” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 109, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0732” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-146, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0732” is detected)>>Go to TM-146, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969631 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 2nd ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 2nd Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-147 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000004969632 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 3GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969633 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-148, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0733 Gear 3 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • VQ37VHR models - 2.165 or more - 1.921 or less • V9X models - 2.103 or more - 1.865 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) TM-148 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0733” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 109, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0733” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-148, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0733” is detected)>>Go to TM-148, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969634 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 3rd ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 3rd Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-149 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000004969635 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 4GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969636 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-150, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0734 Gear 4 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • VQ37VHR models - 1.496 or more - 1.328 or less • V9X models - 1.453 or more - 1.289 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) TM-150 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 109, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0734” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-150, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0734” is detected)>>Go to TM-150, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969637 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 4th ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 4th Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-151 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000004969638 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969639 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-152, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “5TH GR FNCTN P0735” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0735 Gear 5 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • 1.060 or more • 0.940 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) TM-152 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0735” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 109, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0735” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-152, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0735” is detected)>>Go to TM-152, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969640 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 5th ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 5th Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-153 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969642 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 30 seconds or more. NOTE: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P0740” detected? YES >> Go to TM-153, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969643 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0740 Torque Converter Clutch Circuit/ Open A DTC is set if the torque converter clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the torque converter clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 2nd VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more TM-154 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER Description INFOID:0000000004969644 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969645 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more. NOTE: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P0744” detected? YES >> Go to TM-154, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969646 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0744 Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Intermittent The lock-up is not performed in spite of within the lock-up area. • Harness or connectors • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Torque converter • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 2nd VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A TM-155 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969648 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Wait for 5 seconds or more at idle speed in “N” position. 3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0745” detected? YES >> Go to TM-155, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969649 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0745 Pressure Control Solenoid A The line pressure solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the line pressure solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Line pressure solenoid valve TM-156 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969651 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0750” detected? YES >> Go to TM-156, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969652 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0750 Shift Solenoid A • The anti-interlock solenoid valve monitor value is ON when the anti-interlock solenoid valve command value is OFF. • The anti-interlock solenoid valve monitor value is OFF when the anti-interlock solenoid valve command value is ON. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Anti-interlock solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 1st VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B TM-157 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969654 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0775” detected? YES >> Go to TM-157, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969655 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0775 Pressure Control Solenoid B The input clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the input clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Input clutch solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 1st VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-158 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P0780 SHIFT P0780 SHIFT Description INFOID:0000000004969656 The TCM detects the malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969657 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “ACCELE POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0780” detected? YES >> Go to TM-158, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969658 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0780 Shift Error • When shifting from 3GR to 4GR with the selector lever in “D” position, the gear ratio does not shift to 1.412 (gear ratio of 4GR) • When shifting from 5GR to 6GR or 6GR to 7GR, the engine speed exceeds the prescribed speed. • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • Hydraulic control circuit SLCT LVR POSI : D ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8 GEAR : 3rd → 4th P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C TM-159 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969660 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0795” detected? YES >> Go to TM-159, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969661 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0795 Pressure Control Solenoid C The front brake solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the front brake solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Front brake solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 7th VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-160 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P1585 G SENSOR P1585 G SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969663 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate side. 4. Start up in M1, and then upshift M2. 5. Accelerate the vehicle speed regularly from approximately 20 km/h (13 MPH) to approximately 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 8 seconds in M2. 6. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1585” detected? YES >> Go to TM-160, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969664 1.CHECK G SENSOR SIGNAL 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Select “G SEN SLOPE” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 4. Swing the vehicle body and check that the value varies between −40.45 – 40.45%. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 1) DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1585 G Sensor Circuit • The output voltage value of G sensor is outside the standard for the specified period of time caused by open circuit, short circuit, or malfunction of G sensor. • The movable gauging component of G sensor is stuck for the specified period of time during driving. • G sensor • Harness or connector (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Monitor item Condition Status G SEN SLOPE Level road 0% Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%) Downhill slope Negative value (minimum −40.45%) P1585 G SENSOR TM-161 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 1. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Touch “Erase”. 3. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement". 4. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-160, "DTC Logic". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". 3.CHECK G SENSOR POWER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect G sensor connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between G sensor vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 8. 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM connectors. 3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and G sensor vehicle side harness connector terminals. *1: VQ37VHR models *2: V9X models Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 2) Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. *1: VQ37VHR models *2: V9X models Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G sensor vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal B248 3 5 V ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M164*1 116 B248 2 Existed 119 1 M113*2 76 1 77 2 ECM vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M164*1 116 Not existed 119 M113*2 76 77 TM-162 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P1585 G SENSOR 6.CHECK G SENSOR 1. Remove G sensor. Refer to TM-209, "Exploded View". 2. Reconnect all the connectors. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between ECM connector terminal and ground. *1: VQ37VHR models *2: V9X models Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Replace G sensor. Refer to TM-209, "Exploded View". 7.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 2) 1. Install G sensor. Refer to TM-209, "Exploded View". 2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Touch “Erase”. 4. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement". 5. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-160, "DTC Logic". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". 8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM connectors. 3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and G sensor vehicle side harness connector terminal. *1: VQ37VHR models *2: V9X models Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 2) Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. : Direction of gravitational force ECM connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal M164*1 M113*2 119*1 76*2 Vertical (–1G) (A) 1.17 V Horizontal (B) 2.5 V Vertical (1G) (C) 3.83 V SCIA8343J ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M164*1 111 B248 3 Existed M113*2 54 ECM vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Terminal Connector M164*1 111 Not existed M113*2 54 P1585 G SENSOR TM-163 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check ECM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to EC-164, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004969665 G sensor calibration must be performed when removing or replacing the G sensor. 1.PERFORM CALIBRATION Perform G sensor calibration. >> Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement". TM-164 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P1705 TP SENSOR P1705 TP SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969667 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1705” detected? YES >> Go to TM-164, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969668 1.CHECK DTC OF ECM With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-487, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC OF TCM With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC other than “P1705” detected? YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index" (VQ37VHR), EC-1184, "DTC Index" (V9X). NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1705 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Signal Circuit TCM detects the difference between two accelerator pedal position signals received from ECM via CAN communication. Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) SLCT LVR POSI : D VHCL/S SE-A/T : 5 km/h (3 MPH) or more P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TM-165 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Description INFOID:0000000004969669 The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM via CAN communication line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use the vehicle speed signal. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969670 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “VHCL/S SE-AT” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION” 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1721” detected? YES >> Go to TM-166, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1721 Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit • The vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM is 5 km/ h (3MPH) or less when the vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor is 20 km/h or more. (Only when starts after the ignition switch is turned ON.) • The vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor does not decrease despite the 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more of deceleration in vehicle speed received from the unified meter and A/C amp. when the vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM is 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more and the vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor is 24 (15 MPH) or more. Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) VHCL/S SE-A/T : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more TM-166 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969671 1.CHECK DTC OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-116, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC OF TCM With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC other than “P1721” detected? YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index". NO >> GO TO 3. 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P1730 INTERLOCK TM-167 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P1730 INTERLOCK Description INFOID:0000000004969672 Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969673 DTC DETECTION LOGIC NOTE: When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, an input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is not an input speed sensor malfunction. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-168, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle the following condition. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P1730” detected? YES >> Go to TM-168, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Judgment of Interlock INFOID:0000000004969674 Refer to TM-105, "Fail-Safe". DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1730 Interlock The output speed sensor detects the deceleration of 12 km/ h (7 MPH) or more for 1 second. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Hydraulic control circuit SLCT LVR POSI : D GEAR : 1st through 7th TM-168 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P1730 INTERLOCK Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969675 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-169 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000004969676 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 7GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969677 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-170, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “7TH GR FNCTN P1734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1734 Gear 7 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • VQ37VHR models - 0.818 or more - 0.726 or less • V9X models - 0.822 or more - 0.730 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) TM-170 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P1734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 109, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P1734” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-170, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P1734” is detected)>>Go to TM-170, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969678 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 7th ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 7th Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-171 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P1815 M-MODE SWITCH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969680 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “MANU MODE SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Maintain the following each conditions more than 60 seconds. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1815” detected? YES >> Go to TM-171, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969681 1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”, “SFT UP ST SW” and “SFT DWN ST SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1815 Manual Mode Switch Circuit • TCM monitors manual mode, non manual mode, up or down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossible input pattern occurs 2 second or more. • When shift up/down signal of paddle shifter continuously remains ON for 60 seconds. • Harness or connectors (These switches circuit is open or shorted.) • Mode select switch (Into A/T shift selector) • Position select switch (Into A/ T shift selector) • Paddle shifter SLCT LVR POSI : D MANU MODE SW : ON TM-172 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P1815 M-MODE SWITCH Without CONSULT-III Drive the vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the indication of the shift position indicator matches with the actual gear position. 1. Shift the selector lever to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR. 2. Shift the selector lever to − side, and then decelerate from7GR to 1GR. 3. Shift the paddle shifter (shift-up) to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR. 4. Shift the paddle shifter (shift-down) to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR. Which item is abnormal? Manual mode switch>>GO TO 2. Paddle shifter>>GO TO 7. 2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 4. 3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-175, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Item Monitor Item Condition Status Manual mode switch MANU MODE SW Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON Other than the above OFF NON M-MODE SW Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF Other than the above ON UP SW LEVER Selector lever is shifted to + side ON Other than the above OFF DOWN SW LEVER Selector lever is shifted to − side ON Other than the above OFF Paddle shifter SFT UP ST SW Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled ON Other than the above OFF SFT DWN ST SW Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled ON Other than the above OFF A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal + − M137 1 4 Battery voltage 2 3 5 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-173 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1) 1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2) Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> GO TO 9. 8.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 4 Existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 1 M66 10 Existed 2 25 3 5 5 11 A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 1 Not existed 2 3 5 Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal + − M38 3 1 Battery voltage M39 TM-174 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P1815 M-MODE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-175, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)]" and TM-175, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)]". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 10. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1) 1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector. 2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 11. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2) Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 13. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 13.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. 1. Reconnect all the connectors. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Select “M RANGE SW”, “NM RANGE SW”, “AT SFT UP SW”, “AT SFT DWN SW”, “ST SFT UP SW” and “ST SFT DWN SW” in “Data Monitor” in “METER/M&A”. Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M38 1 Existed M39 Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M38 3 M66 6 Existed M39 26 Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M38 3 Not existed M39 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-175 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 4. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item. Refer to MWI-94, "Reference Value". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-149, "Exploded View". Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000004969682 1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)] 1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-up) connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-208, "Exploded View". Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)] INFOID:0000000004969684 1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-down) connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-208, "Exploded View". A/T shift selector connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal M137 1 4 Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Existed Other than the above Not existed 2 Selector lever is shifted to − side Existed Other than the above Not existed 3 Selector lever is shifted to + side Existed Other than the above Not existed 5 Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Not existed Other than the above Existed Paddle shifter (shift-up) connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal M38 1 3 Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled Existed Other than the above Not existed Paddle shifter (shift-down) connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal M39 1 3 Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled Existed Other than the above Not existed TM-176 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969686 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P2713” detected? YES >> Go to TM-176, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969687 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P2713 Pressure Control Solenoid D The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 3rd VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E TM-177 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969689 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P2722” detected? YES >> Go to TM-177, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969690 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P2722 Pressure Control Solenoid E The low brake solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the low brake solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Low brake solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 1st VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-178 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969692 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P2731” detected? YES >> Go to TM-178, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969693 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P2731 Pressure Control Solenoid F The 2346 brake solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the 2346 brake solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • 2346 brake solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 2nd VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G TM-179 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004969695 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P2807” detected? YES >> Go to TM-179, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969696 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P2807 Pressure Control Solenoid G The direct clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the direct clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Direct clutch solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 1st VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-180 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969698 1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. 3. Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 4. 2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 2) Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 5. 3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1) Check the following. • Harness for short or open between battery positive terminal and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal 2. Refer to PG-16, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -". • Battery • 10A fuse (No.36, located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box). Refer to PG-230, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Fuse and Fusible Link Arrangement". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal F51 2 Always Battery voltage A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal F51 1 Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage Turn ignition switch OFF 0 V 6 Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage Turn ignition switch OFF 0 V A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal F51 5 Existed 10 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT TM-181 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 2) Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2) Check the following. • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". • Ignition switch • 10A fuse (No.43, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-232, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". • IPDM E/R Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E7 58 F51 1 Existed 6 A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E51 1 Not existed 6 TM-182 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000005332271 TCM transmits a shift position signal and a manual mode indicator signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication line. While the vehicle is running, the unified meter and A/C amp. displays a shift position on the combination meter, according to these signals. Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004969700 1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1. Start the engine. 2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the shift position indicator mutually coincide. 3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the shift position indicator mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to TM-182, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969701 1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-III CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the “SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide. Refer to TM-99, "Reference Value". 4. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the “SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Refer to TM-99, "Reference Value". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.]>>•Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-175, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)". • Check A/T main system. Refer to TM-105, "Fail-Safe". - Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index". NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>•Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index". NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>•Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-109, "DTC Index". NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator)>>•Check the unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-6, "Work flow". SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-183 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004969704 1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position. 3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released. Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position? YES >> Go to TM-183, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2) Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed. Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to TM-183, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure". FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969705 1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect shift lock relay. 3. Check voltage between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 10. 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 1) Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY Check shift lock relay. Refer to TM-187, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2) 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Shift lock relay harness connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E52 2 Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage Released brake pedal. 0 V Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E52 1 Existed TM-184 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 20. 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2) Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 2) Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND SHIFT LOCK UNIT 1. Disconnect shift lock unit connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E52 5 Battery voltage Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E52 3 E137 8 Existed Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E52 3 Not existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 4 Existed A/T shift selector connector Shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 8 M222 3 Existed 4 4 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-185 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 9.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID 1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-187, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 10.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 3) 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. 2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 15. NO >> GO TO 11. 11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) 1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector. 2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 13. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 13.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1) Check the following. • Harness for short or open between battery and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-16, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -". • Battery • 10A fuse [No.7, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". • Fuse block (J/B) Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 14. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 14.CHECK DTC OF ICC Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E110 3 Battery voltage Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E103 8F E110 3 Existed Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E103 8F Not existed TM-186 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ICC”. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to CCS-293, "DTC Index". NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". 15.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-188, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 18. NO >> GO TO 16. 16.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD), BR-60, "Inspection and Adjustment" (RHD). >> GO TO 17. 17.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-188, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-71, "Exploded View" (RHD). 18.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 1) Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 19. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 19.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 2) Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 14. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 20.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector. 3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal. Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E110 4 E52 2 Existed Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E110 4 Not existed SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-187 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 21. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 21.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 22. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 22.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2) Check the following. • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". • Ignition switch • 10A fuse [No.3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". • Fuse block (J/B) Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000004969706 1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is activated. CAUTION: Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. Can the lock plate be moved up and down? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay) INFOID:0000000004969707 1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY Check continuity between shift lock relay terminals 3 and 5. CAUTION: Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E103 4F E52 5 Existed Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E103 4F Not existed Shift lock unit connector Condition Status Connector Terminal + (fuse) − M222 3 4 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 3 and 4. Shift lock solenoid operates TM-188 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace shift lock relay. FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000004969708 1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals 3 and 4. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-71, "Exploded View" (RHD). EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006057542 1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 1) 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. 3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released. Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position? YES >> Go to TM-188, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 2) Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed. Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to TM-188, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure". EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006057543 1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Shift lock relay connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal E52 3 5 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 1 and 2. Existed OFF Not existed Stop lamp switch connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal E110 3 4 Depressed brake pedal. Existed Released brake pedal. Not existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal M137 8 Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage Released brake pedal. 0 V SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-189 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 5. 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND SHIFT LOCK UNIT 1. Disconnect shift lock unit connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK SHIFT LOCK UNIT 1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 2. Check shift lock unit. Refer to TM-191, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 5.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 9. 6.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-191, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> GO TO 12. A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 4 Existed A/T shift selector connector Shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 8 M222 3 Existed 4 4 Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E110 3 Battery voltage TM-190 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM 7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1) Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2) Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector. 3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 10. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 11. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following. • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". • Ignition switch • 10A fuse [No.3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". • Fuse block (J/B) Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E110 4 M137 8 Existed Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E110 4 Not existed Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E103 4F E110 3 Existed Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E103 4F Not existed SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-191 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 12.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD) or BR-60, "Inspection and Adjustment" (RHD). >> GO TO 13. 13.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-191, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD) or BR-71, "Exploded View" (RHD). EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000006057544 1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is activated. CAUTION: Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. Can the lock plate be moved up and down? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000006057545 1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD) or BR-71, "Exploded View" (RHD). Shift lock unit connector Condition Status Connector Terminal + (fuse) − M222 3 4 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 3 and 4. Shift lock solenoid operates Stop lamp switch connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal E110 3 4 Brake pedal depressed Existed Brake pedal released Not existed TM-192 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004969710 1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check that each position indicator lamp of the selector lever position indicator turns on when shifting the selector lever from “P” to “M” position. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to TM-192, "Diagnosis Procedure". 2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2) Check that the night illumination of the selector lever position indicator turns on when setting the lighting switch in 1st position. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to TM-192, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969711 1.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Which item is abnormal? Position indicator lamp>> GO TO 2. Illumination lamp>> GO TO 11. 2.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 8. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH (PART 1) 1. Disconnect shift position switch connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connector terminals. A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal M137 10 Battery voltage A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 4 Existed SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR TM-193 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1) 1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector. 2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position indicator connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2) Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connector for damage. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 7.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR Check selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-195, "Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 4 M221 7 Selector lever in “D” position. Existed 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11 No existed 9 Selector lever in “M” position. Existed 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11 No existed 10 2, 6 Selector lever in “N” and “M” position. Existed 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed 3, 6 Selector lever in “D” position. Existed 2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed 4, 6 Selector lever in “R” position. Existed 2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed 5, 6 Selector lever in “P” position. Existed 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M221 2 M223 3 Existed 3 4 4 5 5 7 6 6 7 8 9 2 TM-194 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR NO >> Replace damaged parts. 8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 2) Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 10. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 10.CHECK BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL Check BCM input/output signal. Refer to BCS-50, "Reference Value". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 11.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Check illumination circuit. Refer to INL-85, "LHD : Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -" (LHD), INL- 92, "RHD : Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -" (RHD). 12.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH (PART 2) 1. Disconnect shift position switch connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connector terminals. A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 10 M122 96 Existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 10 Not existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal + − M137 7 9 Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR TM-195 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 13. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 13.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1) 1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector. 2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position indicator connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 14. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2) Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connector for damage. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator) INFOID:0000000004969712 1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR Check that selector lever position indicator lamps turn on. CAUTION: Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 7 M221 10 Existed 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 No existed 9 11 Existed 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 No existed Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M221 10 M223 1 Existed 11 9 TM-196 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace the selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". Selector lever position indicator connector Condition Status Connector Terminal + (fuse) − M223 1 9 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 1 and 9. Illumination lamp turns on. 3 8 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 3 and 8. “N” position indicator lamp turns on. 4 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 4 and 8. “D” position indicator lamp turns on. 5 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 5 and 8. “R” position indicator lamp turns on. 7 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 7 and 8. “P” position indicator lamp turns on. 6 2 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 6 and 2. “M” mode indicator lamp turns on. SYSTEM SYMPTOM TM-197 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM SYMPTOM Symptom Table INFOID:0000000004969719 The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1. CAUTION: If any malfunction occurs in the RE7R01A transmission, replace the A/T assembly. Symptom Diagnostic item Control linkage Output speed sensor Vehicle speed signal Accelerator pedal position sensor Engine speed signal Input speed sensor A/T fluid temperature sensor Transmission range switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve CAN communication TM-127 TM-136 TM-165 TM-164 TM-138 TM-135 TM-133 TM-132 TM-155 TM-153 TM-177 TM-159 TM-176 TM-157 TM-179 TM-178 TM-156 TM-129 Poor performance Driving performance Shift point is high in “D” position. 1 2 3 Shift point is low in “D” position. 1 2 Large shock When shifting gears → “D” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 2 5 → “R” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 5 1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4 2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4 3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4 4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4 5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4 6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4 Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed 2 1 4 2 2 3 Upshift when accelerator pedal is released 2 1 4 2 2 3 Lock-up 3 1 3 3 3 2 4 Judder Lock-up 2 1 1 4 3 Strange noise In “R” position 2 1 In “N” position 2 1 In “D” position 2 1 Engine at idle 2 1 TM-198 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SYSTEM SYMPTOM Symptom Diagnostic item Output speed sensor Engine speed signal Input speed sensor A/T fluid temperature sensor Battery voltage Transmission range switch Manual mode switch Stop lamp switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve CAN communication TM-136 TM-138 TM-135 TM-133 TM-180 TM-132 TM-171 TM-188 TM-155 TM-153 TM-177 TM-159 TM-176 TM-157 TM-179 TM-178 TM-156 TM-129 Function trouble Gear does no change “D” position Locks in 1GR 1 1 1 1 Locks in 5GR 1 1GR → 2GR 1 1 1 1 2GR → 3GR 1 3GR → 4GR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4GR → 5GR 1 1 5GR → 6GR 1 6GR → 7GR 1 1 1 1 1 5GR → 4GR 1 4GR → 3GR 1 1 1 3GR → 2GR 1 1 2GR → 1GR 1 1 1 Does not lock-up 1 1 1 1 3 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 “M” position 1GR ⇔ 2GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2GR ⇔ 3GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3GR ⇔ 4GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4GR ⇔ 5GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5GR ⇔ 6GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 6GR ⇔ 7GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SYSTEM SYMPTOM TM-199 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Symptom Diagnostic item Control linkage Output speed sensor Engine speed signal Input speed sensor A/T fluid temperature sensor Transmission range switch Manual mode switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve CAN communication TM-127 TM-136 TM-138 TM-135 TM-133 TM-132 TM-171 TM-155 TM-153 TM-177 TM-159 TM-176 TM-157 TM-179 TM-178 TM-156 TM-129 Function trouble Poor shifting Slip When shifting gears 1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2 2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2 3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2 4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 Engine brake does not work “D” position → “M” position 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 3 “M” position 7GR → 6GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3 6GR → 5GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3 5GR → 4GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3 4GR → 3GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 3GR → 2GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3 2GR → 1GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3 Poor power transmission Slip With selector lever in “D” position, acceleration is extremely poor. 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 With selector lever in “R” position, acceleration is extremely poor. 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 While starting off by accelerating in 1GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 2GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 3GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 4GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2 TM-200 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SYSTEM SYMPTOM Function trouble Poor power transmission Slip While accelerating in 5GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 6GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 7GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 Lock-up 3 3 3 4 1 1 2 No creep at all. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Extremely large creep. 1 Symptom Diagnostic item Control linkage Output speed sensor Engine speed signal Input speed sensor A/T fluid temperature sensor Transmission range switch Manual mode switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve CAN communication TM-127 TM-136 TM-138 TM-135 TM-133 TM-132 TM-171 TM-155 TM-153 TM-177 TM-159 TM-176 TM-157 TM-179 TM-178 TM-156 TM-129 SYSTEM SYMPTOM TM-201 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Symptom Diagnostic item Control linkage Output speed sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor Engine speed signal Battery voltage Transmission range switch Stop lamp switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve Starter relay TM-127 TM-136 TM-164 TM-138 TM-180 TM-132 TM-188 TM-155 TM-153 TM-177 TM-159 TM-176 TM-157 TM-179 TM-178 TM-156 TM-130 Function trouble Power transmission cannot be performed Vehicle cannot run in all position. 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Driving is not possible in “D” position. 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Driving is not possible in “R” position. 3 2 1 1 1 Engine stall 3 4 4 5 2 1 Engine stalls when selector lever shifted “N” → “D” or “R”. 3 4 4 2 1 Engine does not start in “N” or “P” position. 3 1 2 1 Engine starts in position other than “N” or “P”. 3 2 1 Poor operation Vehicle does not enter parking condition. 1 2 Parking condition is not cancelled. 1 2 Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2 Vehicle moves forward with the “R” position. 1 2 Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2 Vehicle moves backward with the “D” position. 1 2 TM-202 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] A/T SHIFT SELECTOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A/T SHIFT SELECTOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969727 LHD models JSDIA1414GB A/T SHIFT SELECTOR TM-203 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Indicator plate 4. Selector lever position indicator 5. Harness connector 6. Insert finisher 7. Control rod 8. Dust cover 9. Bracket 10. Dust cover plate 11. Snap pin 12. Washer 13. Collar 14. Pivot pin 15. Insulator 16. Shift lock unit 17. A/T shift selector assembly 18. Adapter : Apply multi-purpose grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not describe on the above. TM-204 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] A/T SHIFT SELECTOR RHD models JSDIA1415GB 1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Adapter 4. A/T shift selector assembly 5. Shift lock unit 6. Pivot pin 7. Washer 8. Collar 9. Snap pin 10. Insulator 11. Dust cover plate 12. Bracket 13. Dust cover 14. Control rod 15. Insert finisher 16. Harness connector 17. Selector lever position indicator 18. Indicator plate A/T SHIFT SELECTOR TM-205 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969728 REMOVAL 1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position. 2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector. 3. Shift the selector lever to “N” position. 4. Remove knob cover (A) below selector lever downward. 5. Pull lock pin (1) out of selector lever knob (2). 6. Remove selector lever knob. 7. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-37, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View". CAUTION: When disconnecting selector lever position indicator connector from shift position switch, never twist or apply an excessive load to the connector. 8. Remove rear ventilator duct 1. Refer to VTL-10, "Exploded View". 9. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector. 10. Remove harness clips from A/T shift selector assembly. 11. Shift the selector lever to “P” position. 12. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts. 13. Slightly lift the A/T shift selector assembly (1) and slide it rightward. Then pull it out in the diagonally right direction. 14. Remove snap pin, washers, insulator, collar and pivot pin from A/T shift selector assembly. 15. Remove adapter from A/T shift selector assembly. 16. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector assembly. 17. Remove dust cover from dust cover plate. 18. Remove shift lock unit from A/T shift selector assembly. 19. Remove brackets from vehicle floor panel. 20. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher assembly. a. Remove indicator assembly from console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-37, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View". b. Remove insert finisher from indicator assembly. c. Remove selector lever position indicator. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing a collar) of the pivot pin. • Apply multi-purpose grease on the surface that the shift lock unit plate slides vertically. • Refer to the followings when installing selector lever knob to A/T shift selector assembly. 1. Insert lock pin to selector lever knob. 2. Install selector lever knob over selector lever until a click is felt. CAUTION: • Install it straight, and never tap or apply any shock to install it. • Never press selector button. : Apply multi-purpose grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not describe on the above. JPDIA0898ZZ JPDIA0055ZZ TM-206 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] A/T SHIFT SELECTOR Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969729 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check the A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment". ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust the A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment". CONTROL ROD TM-207 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P CONTROL ROD Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969730 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969731 REMOVAL 1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position. 2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 3. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly. 4. Remove control rod from manual lever. 5. Remove insulator and collar from manual lever. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing collar) of the tip of the control rod. Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969732 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment". ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment". 1. A/T assembly 2. Manual lever 3. Lock washer 4. Control rod 5. Washer 6. Insulator 7. Collar 8. Conical washer 9. Snap pin : Apply multi-purpose grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. JSDIA1002GB TM-208 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] PADDLE SHIFTER PADDLE SHIFTER Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969733 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969734 REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-14, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View". 2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors from each paddle shifter. 3. Remove paddle shifter mounting bolts and nuts. 4. Remove each paddle shifter from steering column assembly. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. 1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up) Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA0051GB G SENSOR TM-209 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P G SENSOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969735 CAUTION: • Refer to TM-121, "Description" when removing or replacing G sensor. • Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact. • Never use power tool to avoid impact. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969736 CAUTION: • Refer to TM-121, "Description" when removing or replacing G sensor. • Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact. • Never use power tool to avoid impact. REMOVAL 1. Remove luggage floor spacer (RH). Refer to INT-30, "FOR EUROPE : Exploded View". 2. Disconnect G sensor connector. 3. Remove G sensor from bracket. 4. Remove bracket from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Install bracket with care of correct installation direction. Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969737 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Refer to TM-121, "Description". 1. G sensor 2. Bracket : Vehicle front Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JSDIA0950GB TM-210 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] OIL PAN OIL PAN VQ37VHR VQ37VHR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969738 VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969739 REMOVAL 1. Drain ATF through drain plug. 2. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". 3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A). 4. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1). 5. Remove bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". 1. A/T assembly 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Oil pan 4. Clip 5. Oil pan mounting bolt 6. Overflow plug 7. Drain plug 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Magnet Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA0883GB : Vehicle front : Bolt SCIA8269E OIL PAN TM-211 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 6. Remove clips (1). 7. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket. 8. Remove magnets from oil pan. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the magnet, and then assembly. • Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface of transmission case and oil pan. • Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts. • Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position. • Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. In addition, install new drain plug and drain plug gasket after adjustment of A/T fluid filling. • Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in the numerical order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. VQ37VHR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969740 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. • If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair A/ T. Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for A/T fluid leakage. ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment". V9X : Vehicle front : Oil pan mounting bolt JSDIA0793ZZ : Vehicle front JSDIA0794ZZ SCIA5199E TM-212 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] OIL PAN V9X : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005986728 V9X : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005986729 REMOVAL 1. Drain ATF through drain plug. 2. Remove oil pan (1) and oil pan gasket. 3. Remove magnets from oil pan. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the magnet, and then assembly. • Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface of transmission case and oil pan. • Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts. • Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position. 1. A/T assembly 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Oil pan 4. Oil pan mounting bolt 5. Overflow plug 6. Drain plug 7. Drain plug gasket 8. Magnet Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA1072GB : Vehicle front : Oil pan mounting bolt JPDIA1073ZZ OIL PAN TM-213 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. In addition, install new drain plug and drain plug gasket after adjustment of A/T fluid filling. • Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in the numerical order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. V9X : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005986730 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. • If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair A/ T. Refer to CO-16, "Exploded View". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for A/T fluid leakage. ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment". : Vehicle front JPDIA1074ZZ SCIA5199E TM-214 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] AIR BREATHER HOSE AIR BREATHER HOSE VQ37VHR VQ37VHR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969741 VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969742 REMOVAL 1. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-114, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". 2. Remove A/T air breather hose. 3. Remove propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-124, "Exploded View". 4. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View". 5. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack. CAUTION: When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and overflow plug. 6. Remove rear engine mounting member with a power tool. Refer to EM-71, "Exploded View". 7. Remove bolt fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool. 8. Remove transfer air breather hose from air breathre tube. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Never bend the A/T air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose. • Insert A/T air breather hose to A/T air breather tube all the way to the curve of the tube. 1. Air breather tube 2. A/T assembly 3. A/T air breather hose 4. Clip 5. A/T air breather tube Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA0932GB AIR BREATHER HOSE TM-215 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • Be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the radius curve end when inserting A/T air breather hose to air breather tube (for A/T) (1). • Install A/T air breather hose to air breather tube (for A/T) so that the paint mark is facing upward. • Securely install the clip to the brackets when installing A/T air breather hose to the bracket. V9X V9X : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005986726 V9X : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005986727 REMOVAL 1. Remove propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-118, "V9X : Exploded View". 2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View". 3. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack. CAUTION: When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and overflow plug. 4. Remove rear engine mounting member with a power tool. Refer to EM. 5. Remove air breather tube mounting bolt. 6. Remove air breathre tube and A/T air breathre hose. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Never bend the A/T air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose. • Insert A/T air breather hose to A/T air breather tube all the way to the curve of the tube. 2 : For transfer JPDIA0931ZZ 1. Air breather tube 2. A/T assembly 3. A/T air breather tube 4. Clip 5. A/T air breather hose Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA1077GB TM-216 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] AIR BREATHER HOSE • Be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the spool (A) portion when inserting A/T air breather hose to the air breather tube (for A/T) (1). • Install A/T air breather hose to air breather tube (for A/T) so that the paint mark is facing upward. • Securely install the clip to the brackets when installing air breather hose to the bracket. 2 : For transfer JPDIA1079ZZ FLUID COOLER SYSTEM TM-217 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P FLUID COOLER SYSTEM VQ37VHR VQ37VHR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969743 LHD models JPDIA0854GB 1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube 4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. Clip 6. Bracket 7. Bracket 8. Hose clamp 9. A/T fluid cooler hose B 10. A/T fluid cooler hose A A. To radiator Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. TM-218 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] FLUID COOLER SYSTEM RHD models VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969744 REMOVAL 1. Remove air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-29, "Exploded View". 2. Remove engine under cover with a power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". 3. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose A and A/T fluid cooler hose B. 4. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-114, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". 5. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A). 6. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1). 7. Remove harness bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM- 225, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". 8. Remove front suspension member. Refer to FSU-22, "Exploded View". 9. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from A/T assembly and engine assembly. 10. Plug up opening such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole. 11. Remove clips and brackets. 12. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from the vehicle. JPDIA0930GB 1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube 4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. Bracket 6. Clip 7. Bracket 8. Hose clamp 9. A/T fluid cooler hose B 10. A/T fluid cooler hose A A. To radiator Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. : Vehicle front : Bolt SCIA8269E FLUID COOLER SYSTEM TM-219 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P CAUTION: Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Never reuse copper washer. • Refer to the following when installing A/T fluid cooler hoses. *: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab. - The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends. - When installing hose clamps center line of each hose clamp tab should be positioned as shown in the figure. - Insert A/T fluid cooler hose according to dimension “L” described below. Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp* A/T fluid cooler hose A Radiator assembly side Facing backward A A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B A/T fluid cooler hose B Radiator assembly side Facing downward C A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B D : Vehicle front E : Vehicle upper JPDIA0965ZZ (1) (2) Tube type Dimension “L” A/T fluid cooler hose A Radiator assembly side A End reaches the radius curve end. A/T fluid cooler tube side B 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (D).] A/T fluid cooler hose B Radiator assembly side C Insert the hose until the hose touches the radiator. A/T fluid cooler tube side B 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (D).] JSDIA0882ZZ TM-220 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] FLUID COOLER SYSTEM - Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of A/T fluid cooler hoses (2) with dimension (A) from the hose edge. - Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube. VQ37VHR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969745 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for A/T fluid leakage. ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment". V9X Dimension “A” : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in) SCIA8123E FLUID COOLER SYSTEM TM-221 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P V9X : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005986723 1. A/T assembly 2. A/T fluid cooler hose A 3. Hose clamp 4. A/T fluid cooler tube A 5. Copper washer 6. A/T fluid cooler tube B 7. A/T fluid cooler hose B 8. A/T fluid cooler hose C 9. A/T fluid cooler hose D 10. Bypass valve 11. Heat insulator 12. Bracket 13. Clip 14. A/T fluid cooler tube C 15. A/T fluid cooler tube D 16. Bracket 17. Bracket 18. A/T fluid cooler hose E 19. A/T fluid cooler hose F C. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-228, "V9X : Removal and Installation". JPDIA1078GB TM-222 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] FLUID COOLER SYSTEM V9X : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005986724 REMOVAL 1. Remove air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-29, "Exploded View". 2. Remove engine under cover with a power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". 3. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose E and F. 4. Separate propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-118, "V9X : Exploded View". 5. Remove heat insulator from A/T assembly. 6. Remove the following parts. • A/T fluid cooler tube A • A/T fluid cooler tube B • A/T fluid cooler hose A • A/T fluid cooler hose B • A/T fluid cooler hose C • A/T fluid cooler hose D • Bypass valve CAUTION: Be careful not to bend cooler tubes. 7. Plug up opening such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole. 8. Remove clips and brackets. 9. Remove A/T fluid cooler tube C and D, according to the following steps. a. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-30, "V9X : Exploded View". b. Remove steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-20, "Exploded View". c. Remove lower mounting nuts for the engine mounting insulators (RH and LH). Refer to EM. d. Set a jack under the engine to lift it. e. Loosen front suspension member mounting bolts and nuts to lower front suspension member. Refer to FSU-22, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the front suspension member. f. Remove A/T fluid cooler tube C and D from the vehicle. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Never reuse copper washer. • Refer to the following when installing A/T fluid cooler hoses. FLUID COOLER SYSTEM TM-223 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P *: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab. - The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends. - When installing hose clamps center line of each hose clamp tab should be positioned as shown in the figure. - Insert A/T fluid cooler hose according to dimension “L” described below. A/T fluid cooler hose F A/T fluid cooler tube D side Facing downward B Radiator assembly side Facing backward E Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp* G : Vehicle upper H : Vehicle front JPDIA1087ZZ (1) (2) Tube type Dimension “L” A/T fluid cooler hose A A/T fluid cooler tube A side A 31 mm (1.22 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).] Bypass valve B Until paint mark (F) on the tube is completely hidden. A/T fluid cooler hose B A/T fluid cooler tube B side A 31 mm (1.22 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).] Bypass valve B Until paint mark (F) on the tube is completely hidden. A/T fluid cooler hose C A/T fluid cooler tube C side A 31 mm (1.22 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).] Bypass valve B Until paint mark (F) on the tube is completely hidden. A/T fluid cooler hose D A/T fluid cooler tube D side A 31 mm (1.22 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).] Bypass valve B Until paint mark (F) on the tube is completely hidden. A/T fluid cooler hose E A/T fluid cooler tube C side A 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).] Radiator assembly side C Insert the hose until the hose touches the radiator. A/T fluid cooler hose F A/T fluid cooler tube D side A 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (E).] Radiator assembly side D End reaches the radius curve end. TM-224 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] FLUID COOLER SYSTEM - Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of A/T fluid cooler hoses (2) with dimension “A” from the hose edge. - Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube. V9X : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005986725 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for A/T fluid leakage. ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment". JPDIA1088ZZ Dimension “A” : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in) SCIA8123E TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY TM-225 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY VQ37VHR VQ37VHR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969746 VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969747 REMOVAL CAUTION: • When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T assembly. • Be careful not to damage sensor edge. 1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then release the parking brake. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View". 4. Remove propeller shaft (rear). Refer to DLN-124, "Exploded View". 5. Remove propeller shaft (front). Refer to DLN-114, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". 6. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View". 7. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Refer to EM-116, "Exploded View". CAUTION: • Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it. • Never disassemble. • Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area. 1. A/T assembly 2. Bracket 3. Bracket 4. Bracket 5. Bracket A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-225, "VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation". Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA1071GB TM-226 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY • Never place in an area affected by magnetism. 8. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-19, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". 9. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-46, "Exploded View". 10. Turn crankshaft, and remove four tightening bolts of the drive plate and the torque converter. CAUTION: When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. 11. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes. Refer to TM-217, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". 12. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole. 13. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and overflow plug when setting the transmission jack. NOTE: Be placing wooden block between oil pan (upper) and front suspension member, the removal of A/T assembly from engine becomes easier. 14. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear) with power tool. Refer to EM-71, "Exploded View". 15. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and 4WD solenoid connector. 16. Remove harness and harness brackets. 17. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool. 18. Remove A/T air breather hose, transfer air breather hose and air breather tube. Refer to TM-214, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View" (A/T), DLN-72, "V9X (A/T) : Removal and Installation" (transfer). 19. Remove A/T assembly with transfer assembly from the vehicle. CAUTION: • Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. • Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack. 20. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly with power tool. Refer to DLN-66, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. • Check fitting of dowel pin ( ). SCIA2203E JPDIA0900ZZ TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY TM-227 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • When installing A/T assembly to the engine, be sure to check dimension “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit. • When installing A/T assembly to the engine, attach the fixing bolts in accordance with the following standard. *: Tightening the bolt with bracket of air breather tube. • Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque. CAUTION: • When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. • When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to EM-84, "Exploded View". • Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding after converter is installed to drive plate. VQ37VHR : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969748 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check A/T fluid leakage. • Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment". ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION • Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment". • Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment". • Perform G sensor calibration when replacing A/T assembly. Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement". (Except for Russia) V9X B : Scale C : Straightedge Dimension “A” : Refer to TM-232, "Torque Converter". JPDIA0042ZZ Bolt position A B Insertion direction A/T assembly to engine Engine to A/T assembly Number of bolts 8 4 Bolt length (L) mm (in) 65 (2.56) 35 (1.38) Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34) JPDIA0979ZZ TM-228 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY V9X : Exploded View INFOID:0000000005986720 V9X : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005986721 REMOVAL CAUTION: • When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T assembly. • Be careful not to damage sensor edge. 1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then release the parking brake. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View". 4. Separate propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-118, "V9X : Exploded View". 5. Separate propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-131, "Exploded View". 6. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Refer to EM. CAUTION: • Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it. • Never disassemble. • Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area. • Never place in an area affected by magnetism. 7. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-30, "V9X : Exploded View". 8. Remove six tightening bolts of the drive plate and the torque converter, according to the following steps. a. Remove steering outer sockets (LH and RH) from steering knuckles. Refer to ST-24, "Removal and Installation". 1. A/T assembly 2. Dust cover 3. Bracket 4. Bracket 5. Bracket A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-228, "V9X : Removal and Installation". Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA1075GB TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY TM-229 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P b. Remove the steering gear assembly mounting bolts and slide the steering gear assembly to obtain work space. Refer to ST-20, "Exploded View". c. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM. d. Turn crankshaft, and remove six tightening bolts of the drive plate and the torque converter. CAUTION: When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. 9. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes, A/T fluid cooler hoses and bypass valve from A/T assembly. Refer to TM- 221, "V9X : Exploded View". 10. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole. 11. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear) with power tool. Refer to EM-71, "Exploded View". 12. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and 4WD solenoid connector. 13. Remove harness and brackets. 14. Remove A/T air breather hose and air breather tube. Refer to TM-214, "VQ37VHR : Exploded View". 15. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool. 16. Remove A/T assembly from the vehicle. CAUTION: • Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. • Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack. 17. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-207, "Exploded View". 18. Remove dust cover from A/T assembly. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. • Check fitting of the dowel pins ( ). • When installing A/T assembly to the engine, be sure to check dimension “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit. SCIA2203E JSDIA1689ZZ B : Scale C : Straightedge Dimension “A” : Refer to TM-232, "Torque Converter". JPDIA0042ZZ TM-230 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY • When installing A/T assembly to the engine, attach the fixing bolts in accordance with the following standard. *: Tightening the bolt with bracket of air breather tube. Refer to TM-215, "V9X : Exploded View". • Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque. CAUTION: • When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. • When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to EM. • Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding after converter is installed to drive plate. V9X : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005986722 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check A/T fluid leakage. • Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment". ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION • Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-124, "Adjustment". • Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-127, "Inspection and Adjustment". • Perform G sensor calibration when replacing A/T assembly. Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement". Bolt position A B Insertion direction A/T assembly to engine Number of bolts 6 3 Bolt length “L” mm (in) 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 35 (3.6, 26) JPDIA1076ZZ SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) TM-231 < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification INFOID:0000000004969749 *1: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". *2: The fluid capacity is the reference value. Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000004969750 VQ37VHR km/h (MPH) • At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. V9X Destination For Russia Except for Russia Engine models VQ37VHR V9X Transmission model code number 3RX4E 3RX5A 1XJ5D Stall torque ratio 1.92 : 1 Transmission gear ratio 1st 4.924 4.783 2nd 3.194 3.103 3rd 2.043 1.984 4th 1.412 1.371 5th 1.000 1.000 6th 0.862 0.871 7th 0.772 0.776 Reverse 3.972 3.859 Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1 Fluid capacity 9.2 liter (8-1/8 Imp qt)*2 CAUTION: • Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF. • Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty. Gear position Throttle position Full throttle Half throttle D1 → D2 53 – 57 (33 – 35) 41 – 45 (25 – 28) D2 → D3 82 – 90 (51 – 56) 64 – 72 (40 – 45) D3 → D4 129 – 139 (80 – 86) 96 – 106 (60 – 66) D4 → D5 189 – 199 (117 – 124) 138 – 148 (86 – 92) D5 → D6 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 175 – 185 (109 – 115) D6 → D7 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 250 – 260 (155 – 162) D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 115 – 125 (71 – 78) D6 → D5 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 115 – 125 (71 – 78) D5 → D4 163 – 173 (101 – 108) 95 – 105 (59 – 65) D4 → D3 108 – 118 (67 – 73) 54 – 64 (34 – 40) D3 → D2 56 – 64 (35 – 40) 10 – 14 (6 – 9) D2 → D1 17 – 21 (11 – 13) 5 – 9 (3 – 6) TM-232 < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ37VHR, V9X)] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) km/h (MPH) • At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000004969751 VQ37VHR • At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF) • At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. V9X • At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF) • At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Stall Speed INFOID:0000000004969752 Torque Converter INFOID:0000000004969753 Gear position Throttle position Full throttle Half throttle D1 → D2 36 – 40 (22 – 25) 32 – 36 (20 – 22) D2 → D3 58 – 66 (36 – 41) 50 – 58 (31 – 36) D3 → D4 95 – 105 (59 – 65) 74 – 84 (46 – 52) D4 → D5 139 – 149 (86 – 93) 95 – 105 (59 – 65) D5 → D6 180 – 190 (112 – 118) 119 – 129 (74 – 80) D6 → D7 195 – 205 (121 – 127) 145 – 155 (90 – 96) D7 → D6 185 – 195 (114 – 121) 99 – 109 (62 – 67) D6 → D5 170 – 180 (106 – 112) 77 – 87 (48 – 54) D5 → D4 129 – 139 (80 – 86) 56 – 66 (35 – 41) D4 → D3 80 – 90 (50 – 56) 38 – 48 (24 – 30) D3 → D2 47 – 55 (29 – 34) 21 – 25 (13 – 16) D2 → D1 7 – 11 (4 – 7) 7 – 11 (4 – 7) Throttle position Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF Closed throttle 47 – 55 (29 – 34) 46 – 54 (29 – 34) Half throttle 58 – 64 (36 – 40) 55 – 63 (34 – 39) Throttle position Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF Closed throttle 41 – 49 (25 – 30) 41 – 49 (25 – 30) Half throttle 109 – 117 (68 – 73) 109 – 117 (68 – 73) Engine models VQ37VHR V9X Stall speed 2,475 – 2,775 rpm 2,117 – 2,417 rpm Engine models VQ37VHR V9X Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 25.0 mm (0.98 in) 32.83 mm (1.293 in) PRECAUTIONS TM-233 < PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS FOR RUSSIA FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000006134085 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. FOR RUSSIA : General Precautions INFOID:0000000006134086 • Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. SEF289H TM-234 < PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] PRECAUTIONS • Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS. If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work. • Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. after replacing the ATF. • Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. • Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. • Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission. • Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. • All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. • Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled. • It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. • The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. • Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. • Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease. • Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. • When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-314, "Changing". • Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehicle by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed. In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selector lever from “P” position to other positions. However, this symptom is not a malfunction witch results in the damage of parts. EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000005476661 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: • To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. • Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”. • Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: • When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) SAT652J PRECAUTIONS TM-235 < PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. • When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA : General Precautions INFOID:0000000005288326 • Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnecting the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. • Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS. If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work. • Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. after replacing the ATF. • Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. • Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. • Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission. • Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. • All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. • Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled. • It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. • The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. • Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. • Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease. • Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. • When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-314, "Changing". • Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehicle by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed. In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selector lever from “P” position to other positions. However, this symptom is not a malfunction witch results in the damage of parts. SEF289H SAT652J TM-236 < PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] PREPARATION PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000005288330 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Tool number Tool name Description 1. 315268E000* O-ring 2. 310811EA5A* Charging pipe A/T fluid changing and adjustment Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts JSDIA1332ZZ PBIC0190E COMPONENT PARTS TM-237 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS A/T CONTROL SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005318352 *1: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly. *2: Except for Russia NOTE: 1. Selector lever position indicator 2. A/T shift selector assembly 3. A/T assembly connector 4. Control valve with TCM*1 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Manual mode indicator 7. Shift position indicator 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. G sensor*2 10. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 11. Paddle shifter (shift-up) A. Center console B. A/T assembly C. Accelerator pedal D. Combination meter E. Luggage floor RH F. Steering wheel JSDIA0922ZZ TM-238 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] COMPONENT PARTS • The following components are included in A/T shift selector assembly (2). - Manual mode select switch - Manual mode position select switch - Shift position switch • The following components are included in control valve with TCM (4). - TCM - Input speed sensor 1, 2 - Output speed sensor - A/T fluid temperature sensor - Transmission range switch - Direct clutch solenoid valve - High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve - Input clutch solenoid valve - Front brake solenoid valve - Low brake solenoid valve - Anti-interlock solenoid valve - 2346 brake solenoid valve - Line pressure solenoid valve - Torque converter clutch solenoid valve A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000004969763 Name Function TCM TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM" Transmission range switch TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch" Output speed sensor TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor" Input speed sensor 1 TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor" Input speed sensor 2 A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor" Input clutch solenoid valve TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve" Front brake solenoid valve TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve" Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve" High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve" Low brake solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve" Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve" 2346 brake solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve" Line pressure solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve" Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve" Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor" Throttle position sensor Manual mode switch TM-240, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch" Paddle shifter TM-241, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter" G sensor* TM-241, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor" A/T CHECK indicator lamp When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. Starter relay STR-6, "A/T : System Description" Stop lamp switch TM-242, "A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description" ECM EC-553, "System Description" BCM BCS-11, "System Description" Unified meter and A/C amp. MWI-9, "METER SYSTEM : System Description" COMPONENT PARTS TM-239 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P *: Except for Russia A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000005318354 • The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. • The TCM is integral with the control valve assembly and built into the A/T assembly. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000005318355 • The transmission range switch incorporates four contact switches. Each contact switch transmits an ON/ OFF signal to the TCM. • The TCM judges a select lever position from a combination of ON/OFF signals transmitted from each contact switch. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005318356 The output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is transmitted to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000005318357 The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the A/ T. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000005318358 The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and transmits a signal to the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318359 • The Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The Input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318360 • The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-24, "System Description" Wheel sensor BRC-39, "Description" Yaw rate/side G sensor BRC-66, "Description" Name Function Select lever position Transmission range switch SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 P OFF OFF OFF OFF R ON OFF OFF ON N ON ON OFF OFF D and M ON ON ON ON TM-240 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] COMPONENT PARTS A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318361 • The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318362 • The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high and low reverse clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318363 • The low brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The low brake solenoid valve controls the low brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318364 • Anti-interlock solenoid valve prevents the simultaneous activation of the input clutch and the low brake. • The anti-interlock solenoid valve is an ON/OFF type solenoid valve. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318365 • The 2346 brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. • The 2346 brake solenoid valve controls the 2346 brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318366 The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6 and M7 by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000005318367 The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor INFOID:0000000005318368 • The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. • The accelerator pedal position sensor detects the accelerator position. • The accelerator pedal position sensor transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. Then, the TCM receives accelerator pedal position signal from the ECM via CAN communication. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000005318369 • The manual mode switch [mode select switch and position select switch (shift-up/shift-down)] is installed in the A/T shift selector assembly. • The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate side or manual shift gate side) of the selector lever and transmits a manual mode signal or a non-manual mode signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-manual mode signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. COMPONENT PARTS TM-241 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • The position select switch (shift-up) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-up side of the manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift up signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode shift up signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. • The position select switch (shift-down) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the shift-down side of the manual shift gate and transmits a manual mode shift down signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode shift down signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter INFOID:0000000005318370 When operating the paddle shifter (shift-up/shift-down), a paddle shifter shift up signal or paddle shifter shift down signal is transmitted to the unified meter and A/C amp. Then, the TCM receives a paddle shifter shift-up signal or a paddle shifter shift-down signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor INFOID:0000000005318371 • The G sensor detects the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle. • The G sensor converts the inclination angle and acceleration to the voltage signal and transmits it to ECM. The TCM calculates the voltage signal that is received from ECM via CAN communication line and judges the inclination angle and acceleration of the vehicle. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Selector Lever Position Indicator INFOID:0000000005318372 Indicates selector lever position. A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005318373 1. Position pin 2. Shift lock unit 3. Shift lock solenoid 4. Slider A 5. Control device harness connector 6. Lock plate 7. Slider B 8. Shift lock relay*1 9. Stop lamp switch 10. Brake pedal 11. Shift lock cover *2 A. A/T shift selector assembly B. Engine room C. Brake pedal, upper D. Center console JSDIA0915ZZ TM-242 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] COMPONENT PARTS *1: For Russia with ICC *2: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover. A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000005318374 *: For Russia with ICC Component Function Shift lock unit Shift lock solenoid Activated by the ignition switch and stop lamp signals, it holds the relative positions of sliders A and B. Lock plate Restricts position pin moving. Shift lock release button Pressing the shift lock release button cancels the shift lock forcibly. Position pin Links with selector knob button and restricts selector lever shift operation. Stop lamp switch For Russia with ICC • When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON. • When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock relay. Except for Russia without ICC • When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON. • When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock unit. Shift lock relay* Current flow to stop lamp switch allows shift lock relay contact ON, and then power is applied to shift lock unit. STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-243 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000004969788 1. Low brake 2. Reverse brake 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. 2nd one-way clutch 6.*1 Rear carrier 7. Mid carrier 8. Input clutch 9.*2 Front sun gear 10.*3 Front carrier 11. Under drive carrier 12. 1st one-way clutch 13. Front brake 14. 2346 brake 15.*4 Input shaft 16. Torque converter 17. Oil pump 18.*2 Under drive sun gear 19.*3 Under drive internal gear 20.*4 Front internal gear 21. Mid sun gear 22.*1 Mid internal gear 23. Rear sun gear 24. Rear internal gear 25. High and low reverse clutch hub 26. Control valve with TCM 27. Parking gear 28. Adapter case 29. Output shaft *1: 6 and 22 are one unit. *2: 9 and 18 are one unit. *3: 10 and 19 are one unit. *4: 15 and 20 are one unit. JSDIA0773ZZ TM-244 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318380 System Description INFOID:0000000005318381 DESCRIPTION JSDIA0877GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-245 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P With the use of 4 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 7-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmission for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 4 sets of multiple-disc brakes and 2 sets of one-way clutches. CLUTCH AND BAND CHART POWER TRANSMISSION “N” Position JSDIA1402GB TM-246 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION Since the low brake is released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. “P” Position JSDIA0880GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-247 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O • The same as for the “N” position, since the low brake is released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not P transmitted to the output shaft. • The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft mechanically. “D1” and “DS1” Positions JSDIA1277GB TM-248 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The 1st one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. • The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0866GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-249 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “M1” Position Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Deceleration from front internal gear Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition — Fixed Input/Output Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from under drive internal gear — Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier TM-250 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. NOTE: The front brake operates only while coasting. • The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear. NOTE: The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. JSDIA0867GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-251 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D2” and “DS2” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Deceleration from front internal gear Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition — Fixed Input/Output Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from under drive internal gear — Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier TM-252 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. • The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0868GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-253 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “M2” Position Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition Fixed — Input/Output Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from under drive internal gear Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier TM-254 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. • The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear. NOTE: The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0869GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-255 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D3”, “DS3” and “M3” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition Fixed — Input/Output Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from under drive internal gear Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier TM-256 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. • The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier. • The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0870GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-257 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D4”, “DS4” and “M4” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition Fixed — Input/Output Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from under drive internal gear Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier TM-258 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. • The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier. • The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0871GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-259 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D5”, “DS5” and “M5” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition Fixed — Input/Output Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from under drive internal gear Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear internal gear Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the rear carrier TM-260 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. • The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier. • The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0872GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-261 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D6”, “DS6” and “M6” Positions Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — input/Output — Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the rear carrier Same number of revolution as the input shaft Same number of revolution as the rear carrier Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft TM-262 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. • The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. • The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear. • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. JSDIA0873GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-263 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Front planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “D7”, “DS7” and “M7” Positions Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition Fixed Output Input Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions — Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — Input/Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier Same number of revolution as the input shaft Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft TM-264 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The under drive carrier is fixed by the front brake. • The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. • The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear. • Each planetary gear enters state described below. STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-265 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear “R” Position Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Deceleration from front internal gear Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition — Fixed Input/Output Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from under drive internal gear — Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition — Input/Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier Same number of revolution as the input shaft Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft TM-266 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION • The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. NOTE: The front brake operates at the fixed speed or less. • The rear carrier and the mid internal gear are fixed by the reverse brake. • The mid sun gear rotates at the same speed as the rear sun gear by operation of the 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch. NOTE: The high and low reverse clutch operates at the fixed speed or less. JSDIA0875GB STRUCTURE AND OPERATION TM-267 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • Each planetary gear enters the state described below. Front planetary gear Under drive planetary gear Rear planetary gear Mid planetary gear Component Description INFOID:0000000005318382 Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear Condition — Output Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Deceleration from front internal gear Deceleration from front internal gear Same number of revolution as the input shaft Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear Condition — Fixed Input/Output Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from under drive internal gear — Same number of revolution as the front carrier Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear Condition Output Fixed Input Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear internal gear — Same number of revolution as the under drive internal gear Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear Condition Input Output Fixed Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Counterclockwise revolution — Number of revolutions Same number of revolution as the rear sun gear Deceleration from mid sun gear — Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the under drive carrier. Input clutch (I/C) Connects the input shaft, the mid internal gear and the rear carrier. Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear. High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear. Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier. Low brake (L/B) Fastens the mid sun gear. 2346 brake (2346/B) Fastens the under drive sun gear. 1st one-way clutch (1st OWC) Allows the under drive carrier to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation. 2nd one-way clutch (2nd OWC) Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation. Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft. Oil pump Driven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and each lubricating system. TM-268 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318383 Except for Russia For Russia JSDIA1344GB JSDIA1537GB SYSTEM TM-269 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000005318384 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART *: Except for Russia SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. • Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors. • Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, etc. • Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids. A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005321617 TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd failsafe and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged. Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case, turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern. Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-309, "Diagnosis Flow". FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION Sensor (or signal) ⇒ TCM function ⇒ Actuator Transmission range switch Accelerator pedal position signal Closed throttle position signal Wide open throttle position signal Engine speed signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Output speed sensor Vehicle speed signal Manual mode switch signal Stop lamp switch signal Side G sensor signal Input speed sensor 1, 2 G sensor signal* Line pressure control (TM-273) Shift change control (TM-275) Shift pattern control (TM-279) Lock-up control (TM-281) Fail-safe control (TM-298) Self-diagnosis (TM-285) CONSULT-III communication line (TM- 285) CAN communication line (TM-320) Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve A/T CHECK indicator lamp Back-up lamp relay Starter relay 1st Fail-Safe The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to 2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped. 2nd Fail-Safe The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunctioning parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured. Final Fail-Safe • Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving. • The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control. TM-270 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM DTC Vehicle condition Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled P0705 — • Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting can be performed) • 30 km/h (19MPH) or less • Lock-up is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Shift position indicator is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is disabled) • Back-up lamp is OFF • Large shift shock — • Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting can be performed) • 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less • Lock-up is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Shift position indicator is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is disabled) • Back-up lamp is OFF • Large shift shock P0710 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed Between • Manual mode is prohibited the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0717 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed Between • Manual mode is prohibited the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0720 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • Only downshift can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • A vehicle speed signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded as an effective signal — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited • A vehicle speed signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded as an effective signal — P0729 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P1734 Neutral malfunction between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 and 7 • Locks in 4GR • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral — • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited Other than the above • Driving with the gear ratio between 1GR and 2GR • Driving with the gear ratio between 2GR and 3GR • Locks in 3GR • Locks in 4GR • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited SYSTEM TM-271 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0730 — • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P0740 — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited P0744 — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited P0750 P0775 P0795 P2713 P2722 P2731 P2807 — • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR • Manual mode is prohibited — • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P0780 — • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P1585 — Idle neutral control is prohibited — Idle neutral control is prohibited P1705 — • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited P1730 — • Neutral • Manual mode is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P1815 Paddle switch malfunction Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited Gate switch malfunction Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited Malfunction of both switches Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited U0300 U1000 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure • Manual mode is prohibited Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0720 and P1721 — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR DTC Vehicle condition Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe TM-272 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control INFOID:0000000005321618 The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured. The TCM has the following protection control. REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. 1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR. TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic substrate in TCM reaches the high temperature. LINE PRESSURE CONTROL Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Control at malfunction Neutral Normal return condition • Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less and • Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less Vehicle behavior • The torque transmission cannot be performed • There is a shock just before a vehicle stop Malfunction detection condition • Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR and • Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH) Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction Vehicle behavior Does not exist Malfunction detection condition TCM electronic substrate temperature • 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds or • 150°C (302°F) Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less Normal return condition • TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F) and • Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8 SYSTEM TM-273 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318387 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005318388 • When an engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque) equivalent to the engine drive force is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve. This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving state. • The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the driving state. • In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure. Normal Control Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the engine drive force. Back-up Control (Engine Brake) When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed. During Shift Change JSDIA1345GB PCIA0008E PCIA0009E TM-274 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set. For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to engine torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic corresponds to engine speed, during engine brake operation. At Low Fluid Temperature When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed temperature, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic. SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL PCIA0010E PCIA0011E SYSTEM TM-275 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318389 SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005318390 Input/Output Signal Chart Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed Shift change control • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • Input clutch solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Line pressure solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve Output speed sensor Vehicle speed A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature ECM Engine speed signal* Accelerator pedal position signal* Closed throttle position signal* Engine and A/T integrated control signal (Engine torque)* BCM Stop lamp switch signal* JSDIA1394GB TM-276 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM *: This signal is transmitted via communication line. The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic is attained. The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque information, etc. Shift Change System Diagram *1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil pressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio. BLIPPING CONTROL This system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolution according to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down. • “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions. - When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression. - When downshifting by the manual mode. PCIA0012E PCIA0013E JSDIA0826GB SYSTEM TM-277 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression. • Engine speed control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”. • ECM synchronizes the engine speed according to the engine speed control demand signal. Downshifting by accelerator pedal depression Downshifting by the manual mode IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL (EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA) Input/Output Signal Chart Sensor Signal Each sensor, switch and TCM function Actuator control unit ⇒ TCM TCM ⇒ ECM ECM ⇒ TCM JSDIA0815GB JSDIA0817GB TM-278 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM *: This signal is transmitted via communication line. The TCM activates low brake solenoid valve and controls the low brake oil pressure to the low pressure level if the driver does not intend to start the vehicle while the vehicle is being stopped in the “D” or “DS” position. Therefore, the low brake is in the release (slip) status and the power transmission route of A/T is the same status as the “N” position. This can decrease the engine load and improves the fuel economy because the drive force of engine is not transmitted to the output shaft of A/T. NOTE: During the cold engine starting, the idle speed is increased to activate the three way catalyst. Idle Neutral Control Start Condition Idle neutral control starts when all of the following conditions are satisfied. However, the control ends when any one of the following conditions becomes insufficient during idle neutral control. NOTE: The idle neutral control is terminated or prohibited when the TCM and ECM detect that the vehicle is in any of the conditions as per the following. • Engine cooling water temperature and A/T fluid temperature are below or above a prescribed temperature. • A/T malfunction occurs. • DTC is detected. • Fail-safe mode activates. • Idle neutral control is performed continuously for a certain period of time. Idle Neutral Control Resume Condition Idle neutral control can be resumed when its start condition is fulfilled after any of the following operations is performed (unless a malfunction occurs in the vehicle). • After driving at more than a prescribed speed. • After shifting the selector lever to any other position than “D” or “DS” position, and then shifting to “D” or “DS” position again. • When idle neutral control start conditions are fulfilled for a certain period of time. SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed N idle instruction signal (Standby signal)* N idle instruction signal (Start signal)* Idle neutral control Low brake solenoid valve Output speed sensor Output shaft revolution A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature Transmission range switch Selector lever position ECM Engine speed signal* Accelerator pedal position signal* Throttle position signal* G sensor signal* BCM Stop lamp switch signal* ABS actuator electric unit (control unit) Pressure sensor signal* Unified meter and A/C amp. Vehicle speed signal* Driving location : Level road and gentle slope Selector lever position : “D” and “DS” position Vehicle speed : 0 km/h (0 MPH) Accelerator pedal opening : 0.0 / 8 Brake pedal : Depress Engine speed : Idle speed SYSTEM TM-279 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318391 SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005318392 It automatically selects the shift pattern (such as road environment and driving style) suitable for the various situations so as to allow the vehicle to be driven efficiently and smoothly. ASC (ADAPTIVE SHIFT CONTROL) Input/Output Signal Chart JSDIA1426GB Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed ASC (Adaptive shift control) • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • Input clutch solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Line pressure solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve Output speed sensor Vehicle speed A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature ECM Engine speed signal* Accelerator pedal position signal* Closed throttle position signal* Engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque)* ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Side G sensor signal* BCM Stop lamp switch signal* TM-280 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM *: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line. • When driving on an up/down slope ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed. Fixing at 4GR, 5GR or 6GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum driving force. On a down-slope, automatic shift-down to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR controls to gain optimum engine brake. • When driving on a curve TCM receives the side G sensor signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). It locks to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR position in moderate cornering or to 3GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This prevents any upshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel. DS Mode • Changes to the shift schedule that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone when ASC is active. • DS mode can be switched according to the following method. - When the selector lever is in the “D” position, shifting the selector lever to manual shift gate enables switching to DS mode. - When in DS mode, shifting the selector lever to the main shift gate enables to cancel DS mode. - After switching to manual mode with paddle shifter, switching to DS mode can not be enabled even when the selector lever is shifted to the manual shift gate. MANUAL MODE Input/Output Signal Chart *: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line. JSDIA1362GB Sensor Signal TCM function Actuator Output speed sensor Vehicle speed Manual mode • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • Input clutch solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Line pressure solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature ECM Engine speed signal* Accelerator pedal position signal* Unified meter and A/C amp. Manual mode signal* Not manual mode signal* Manual mode shift up signal* Manual mode shift down signal* Paddle shifter shift up signal* Paddle shifter shift down signal* Manual mode shift refusal signal* SYSTEM TM-281 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • The TCM receives the manual mode signal, not manual mode signal, manual mode shift up signal, manual mode shift down signal, paddle shifter shift up signal and paddle shifter shift down signal from unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication line. The TCM shifts shift pattern control to the manual mode based on these signals, and then shifts the A/T by operating each solenoid valve according to the shift operation of the driver. • The TCM prohibits the manual mode while being in fail-safe mode due to an A/T malfunction, etc. Refer to TM-298, "Fail-Safe". • The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. if the TCM refuses the transmission from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever or paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side. The unified meter and A/C amp. blinks shift indicator on the combination meter and sounds the buzzer to indicate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this signal. However, the TCM does not transmit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the following. - When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “DOWN (− side)” side while driving in 1GR. - When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)” side while driving in 7GR. LOCK-UP CONTROL LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005318393 LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000005318394 • The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. • Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. • The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases the torque converter clutch piston. JSDIA1350GB JSDIA0847GB TM-282 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM Lock-up Operation Condition Table Lock-up released • In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained. in this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled. Lock-up Applied • In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled. Smooth Lock-up Control When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque converter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock. Half-clutched State • The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the torque converter clutch solenoid pressure. In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into half-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is completed smoothly. Slip Lock-up Control • In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed. This raises the fuel efficiency for 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR and 7GR. A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000005318395 • Shift lock prevents an unintentional start of the vehicle that may be caused by an incorrect operation while selector lever is in the “P” position. • Selector lever can be shifted from the “P” position to another position when the following conditions are satisfied. - Ignition switch ON - Stop lamp switch is ON (brake pedal is depressed) - Selector lever knob button is pressed SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT “P” POSITION When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Shift Operation Allowed) The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is not energized if the brake pedal is not depressed while the ignition switch is ON. The lock plate (B) lowers according to the downward movement of the position pin (C) when the selector button (D) is pressed, and presses only slider B (E) into the shift lock unit. Slider A (F) located below the lock plate prevents the downward movement of the lock plate with the spring force. The selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” position for this reason. However, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit, allowing the selector lever to shift if the shift lock release button is pressed. When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed) Selector lever “D” position “M” position Gear position 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 Lock-up × – – – – – × × × × × × Slip lock-up × × × × × × × × × × × × JSDIA0119ZZ SYSTEM TM-283 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is energized and the relative positions of sliders A (B) and B (C) are maintained when the brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is ON. The lock plate (D) lowers according to the downward movement of the position pin (E), thrusting away sliders A and B, when the selector button (F) is pressed. The position pin lowers to the position that allows shift operation for this reason. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted out of the P position. OPERATION AT OTHER THAN “P” POSITION The shift lock function will not operate at any position other than “P” because the lock plate (A) is only set for the “P” position. Accordingly, the selector lever can be shifted to any position regardless of the brake operation. The position pin (B) enters the “P” position thrusting away the lock plate when the selector lever is shifted to the “P” position. Then, the shift mechanism is locked when the selector button (C) is released. “P” POSITION RETAINING MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK) When ignition switch is not in the ON position, power is not applied to the shift lock solenoid in the shift lock unit. This causes shift lock state, and then “P” position is retained. When an actuating system in the shift lock unit has a malfunction, selector lever is unable to operate from the “P” position even when pressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON. However, when pressing the shift lock release button, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit. This allows shift lock to be released and selector lever enables the select operation from the “P” position. CAUTION: Never use the shift lock release button except when the select lever is inoperative even when pressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON. JSDIA0120ZZ JSDIA0121ZZ TM-284 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000005321442 The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD) performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MI (malfunction indicator) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory and in the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to TM-302, "DTC Index". OBD FUNCTION The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MI (malfunction indicator) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MI automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. For details, refer to EC-670, "Diagnosis Description". DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) TM-285 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000005318475 CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMS *: Although “Function Test” and “Special Function” are selectable, do not use its. WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index". IGN Counter The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD) and indicates the number of times that the ignition switch is turned ON after returning to the normal state from DTC. • CAN malfunction - The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. - The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. - The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. • Other than CAN malfunction - The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. - The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...254 → 255 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. - The number is fixed to255 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 255. DATA MONITOR X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option Diagnostic test mode Function Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately. Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items. Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time. CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram. CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor It monitors the starts of CAN communication. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system. Function Test* This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For engine, more practical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available. Special Function* Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed. Item name Description G SENSOR CALIBRATION Calibrates G sensor. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the TCM from the output shaft revolution. ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) X — Displays the vehicle speed signal received via CAN communication. OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X Displays the output speed calculated from the pulse signal of output speed sensor. TM-286 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X Displays the input speed calculated from front sun gear revolution and front carrier revolution. F SUN GR REV (rpm) — — Displays the front sun gear revolution calculated from the pulse signal of input speed sensor 1. F CARR GR REV (rpm) — — Displays the front carrier gear revolution calculated from the pulse signal of input speed sensor 2. ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X Displays the engine speed received via CAN communication. TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X Displays the revolution difference between input speed and engine speed. ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — Displays the accelerator position estimated value received via CAN communication. THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X Displays the throttle position received via CAN communication. ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) X X Displays the ATF temperature of oil pan calculated from the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor. ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) X X Displays the ATF temperature estimated value of torque converter outlet calculated from the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor. ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) — — Displays the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor. BATTERY VOLT (V) X — Displays the power supply voltage of TCM. LINE PRES SOL (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid. TCC SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid. L/B SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the low brake solenoid. FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the front brake solenoid. HLR/C SOL (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the high and low reverse clutch solenoid. I/C SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the input clutch solenoid. D/C SOLENOID (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the direct clutch solenoid. 2346/B SOL (A) — X Displays the command current from TCM to the 2346 brake solenoid. L/P SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid, and displays the monitor value. TCC SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor value. L/B SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the low brake solenoid, and displays the monitor value. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) TM-287 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P FR/B SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the front brake solenoid, and displays the monitor value. HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the high and low reverse clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor value. I/C SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the input clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor value. D/C SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the direct clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor value. 2346/B SOL MON (A) — — Monitors the command current from TCM to the 2346 brake solenoid, and displays the monitor value. GEAR RATIO — X Displays the gear ratio calculated from input speed and output speed. ENGINE TORQUE (Nm) — — Displays the engine torque estimated value received via CAN communication. ENG TORQUE D (Nm) — — Displays the engine torque estimated value reflected the requested torque of each control unit received via CAN communication. INPUT TRQ S (Nm) — — Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. INPUT TRQ L/P (Nm) — — Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure calculation process of line pressure control. TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of lock-up control. TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRGT PRES L/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of low brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of front brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of input clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM TM-288 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of direct clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. TRG PRE 2346/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — Displays the target oil pressure value of 2346 brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control. SHIFT PATTERN — — Displays the gear change data using the shift pattern control. VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — — Displays the vehicle speed for control using the control of TCM. G SEN SLOPE* (%) X — Displays the inclination angle calculated by the G sensor signal received via CAN communication. RANGE SW 4 (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 4. RANGE SW 3 (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 3. RANGE SW 2 (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 2. RANGE SW 1 (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 1. SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of paddle shifter (down switch). SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of paddle shifter (up switch). DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of selector lever (down switch). UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X — Displays the operation status of selector lever (up switch). NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X — Displays whether the selector lever is in any position other than manual shift gate position. MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X — Displays whether the selector lever is in the manual shift gate position. TOW MODE SW (ON/OFF) — — • Displays the reception status of tow mode signal received via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. DS RANGE (ON/OFF) — — Displays whether it is the DS mode. 1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X — • Displays the reception status of 1 position switch signal received via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X — • Displays the reception status of overdrive control switch signal received via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. BRAKESW (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of stop lamp switch signal received via CAN communication. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) TM-289 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X — • Displays the reception status of POWER mode signal received via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of ASCD OD cancel request signal received via CAN communication. ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of ASCD operation signal received via CAN communication. ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of ABS operation signal received via CAN communication. TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) X — Displays the reception status of TCS gear keep request signal received via CAN communication. TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF) X — Displays whether the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal received via CAN communication is “cold”. TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON/OFF) X — Displays whether the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal received via CAN communication is “warm”. LOW/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of low brake. HC/IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of high and low reversed clutch, input clutch or front brake. IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of input clutch or front brake. HLR/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of high and low reversed clutch. W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X — Displays the kickdown condition signal status received via CAN communication. CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X — Displays the idling status signal status received via CAN communication. DRV CST JUDGE (DRIVE/COAST) — — Displays the judgment results of “driving” or “coasting” judged by TCM. SHIFT IND SIGNAL — — Displays the transmission value of shift position signal transmitted via CAN communication. STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — — Displays the command status from TCM to starter relay. F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — — Displays the transmission status of A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal transmitted via CAN communication. ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — — • Displays the transmission status of ATF temperature signal transmitted via CAN communication. • Not mounted but displayed. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM TM-290 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) *: Except for Russia DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — — Displays the transmission status of manual mode signal transmitted via CAN communication. ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — — Monitors the command value from TCM to the anti-interlock solenoid, and displays the monitor status. START RLY MON (ON/OFF) — — Monitors the command value from TCM to the starter relay, and displays the monitor status. ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — — Displays the command status from TCM to anti-interlock solenoid. SLCT LVR POSI — X Displays the shift positions recognized by TCM. GEAR — X Displays the current transmission gear position recognized by TCM. NEXT GR POSI — — Displays the target gear position of gear change that is calculated based on the vehicle speed information and throttle information. SHIFT MODE — — Displays the transmission driving mode recognized by TCM. D/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of direct clutch. FR/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of front brake. 2346/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of 2346 brake. 2346B/DC PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of 2346 brake or direct clutch. N IDLE STATUS* (ON/OFF) — — Displays the control status of idle neutral control. Monitored item (Unit) Monitor Item Selection ECU IN- Remarks PUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM ITEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) TM-291 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Item Description Check item 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 Following items for “1GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Reverse brake • Each clutch • Hydraulic control circuit 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 Following items for “2GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 Following items for “3GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 Following items for “4GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 5TH GR FNCTN P0735 Following items for “5GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 6TH GR FNCTN P0729 Following items for “6GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) 7TH GR FNCTN P1734 Following items for “7GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK Following items for “TCC solenoid function” can be confirmed. • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Harness or connectors • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Torque converter • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit TM-292 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] TCM ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION TCM Reference Value INFOID:0000000004969912 VALUES ON DIAGNOSIS TOOL NOTE: 1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-III and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: - Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance - Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start - Gear position displayed on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifts are completed 3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. ESTM VSP SIG During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. OUTPUT REV During driving (lock-up ON) Tachometer / Gear ratio INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed. F SUN GR REV During driving Revolution of front sun gear is indicated. F CARR GR REV During driving Revolution of front carrier is indicated. ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading. TC SLIP SPEED During driving Engine speed − Input speed ACCELE POSI Released accelerator pedal 0.0/8 Fully depressed accelerator pedal 8.0/8 THROTTLE POSI Released accelerator pedal 0.0/8 Fully depressed accelerator pedal 8.0/8 ATF TEMP 1 Ignition switch ON Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is indicated. ATF TEMP 2 Ignition switch ON Temperature of ATF at the exit of torque converter. ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 V – 14 V) LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A TCC SOLENOID Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A Lock-up is active 0.8 A Other than the above 0 A L/B SOLENOID Low brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Low brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A TCM TM-293 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P FR/B SOLENOID Front brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Front brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A HLR/C SOL High and low reverse clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A High and low reverse clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A I/C SOLENOID Input clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Input clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A D/C SOLENOID Direct clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Direct clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A 2346/B SOL 2346 brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A 2346 brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A L/P SOL MON During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A TCC SOL MON Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A Lock-up is active 0.8 A Other than the above 0 A L/B SOL MON Low brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Low brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A FR/B SOL MON Front brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Front brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A HLR/C SOL MON High and low reverse clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A High and low reverse clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A I/C SOL MON Input clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Input clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A D/C SOL MON Direct clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A Direct clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A 2346/B SOL MON 2346 brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A 2346 brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A GEAR RATIO Driving with 1GR 4.887 Driving with 2GR 3.170 Driving with 3GR 2.027 Driving with 4GR 1.412 Driving with 5GR 1.000 Driving with 6GR 0.864 Driving with 7GR 0.775 ENGINE TORQUE During driving Changes the value according to the acceleration or deceleration. ENG TORQUE D During driving Changes the value according to the acceleration or deceleration. INPUT TRQ S During driving Changes the value according to the acceleration or deceleration. INPUT TRQ L/P During driving Changes the value according to the acceleration or deceleration. TRGT PRES L/P Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions 490 kPa Other than the above 490 – 1370 kPa TRGT PRES TCC Slip lock-up is active 0 – 600 kPa Lock-up is active 600 kPa Other than the above 0 kPa Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) TM-294 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] TCM TRGT PRES L/B Low brake engaged 1370 kPa Low brake disengaged 0 kPa TRGT PRES FR/B Front brake engaged 1370 kPa Front brake disengaged 0 kPa TRG PRE HLR/C High and low reverse clutch disengaged 1370 kPa High and low reverse clutch engaged 0 kPa TRGT PRES I/C Input clutch disengaged 1370 kPa Input clutch engaged 0 kPa TRGT PRES D/C Direct clutch disengaged 1370 kPa Direct clutch engaged 0 kPa TRG PRE 2346/B 2346 brake engaged 1370 kPa 2346 brake disengaged 0 kPa SHIFT PATTERN During normal driving (without shift changes) FF VEHICLE SPEED During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. G SEN SLOPE*1 Level road 0% Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%) Downhill slope Negative value (minimum − 40.45%) RANGE SW 4 Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions OFF Other than the above ON RANGE SW 3 Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions OFF Other than the above ON RANGE SW 2 Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions OFF Other than the above ON RANGE SW 1 Selector lever in “P” position OFF Other than the above ON SFT DWN ST SW Paddle shifter (shift-down) is shifted ON Other than the above OFF SFT UP ST SW Paddle shifter (shift-up) is shifted ON Other than the above OFF DOWN SW LEVER Selector lever is shifted to − side ON Other than the above OFF UP SW LEVER Selector lever is shifted to + side ON Other than the above OFF NON M-MODE SW Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF Other than the above ON MANU MODE SW Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON Other than the above OFF TOW MODE SW*2 Tow mode ON Other than the above OFF DS RANGE Driving with DS mode ON Other than the above OFF 1 POSITION SW*2 Selector lever in “1” position ON Other than the above OFF Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) TCM TM-295 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P OD CONT SW*2 When overdrive control switch is depressed ON When overdrive control switch is released OFF BRAKESW Depressed brake pedal ON Released brake pedal OFF POWERSHIFT SW*2 Power mode ON Other than the above OFF ASCD-OD CUT When TCM receives ASCD OD cancel request signal ON Other than the above OFF ASCD-CRUISE ASCD operate ON Other than the above OFF ABS SIGNAL ABS operate ON Other than the above OFF TCS GR/P KEEP When TCM receives TCS gear keep request signal ON Other than the above OFF TCS SIGNAL 2 When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal is “cold” ON Other than the above OFF TCS SIGNAL 1 When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal is “warm” ON Other than the above OFF LOW/B PARTS At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL HC/IC/FRB PARTS At 1GR - 2GR - 3GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL IC/FRB PARTS At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL HLR/C PARTS At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL W/O THL POS Fully depressed accelerator pedal ON Released accelerator pedal OFF CLSD THL POS Released accelerator pedal ON Fully depressed accelerator pedal OFF DRV CST JUDGE Depressed accelerator pedal DRIVE Released accelerator pedal COAST Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) TM-296 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] TCM SHIFT IND SIGNAL When the selector lever is positioned in between each position OFF Selector lever in “P” position P Selector lever in “R” position R Selector lever in “N” position N Selector lever in “D” position D Selector lever in “D” position: 7GR Selector lever in “D” position: 6GR 6 Selector lever in “D” position: 5GR 5 Selector lever in “D” position: 4GR 4 Selector lever in “D” position: 3GR 3 Selector lever in “D” position: 2GR 2 Selector lever in “D” position: 1GR 1 Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR M1 Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR M2 Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR M3 Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR M4 Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR M5 Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR M6 Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR M7 Driving with DS mode DS STARTER RELAY Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON Other than the above OFF F-SAFE IND/L For 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON ON Other than the above OFF ATF WARN LAMP*2 When TCM transmits the ATF indicator lamp signal ON Other than the above OFF MANU MODE IND Driving with manual mode ON Other than the above OFF ON OFF SOL MON Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON Driving with 1GR to 3GR Other than the above OFF START RLY MON Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON Other than the above OFF ON OFF SOL Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON Driving with 1GR to 3GR Other than the above OFF Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) TCM TM-297 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P *1: Except for Russia *2: Not mounted but always display as OFF. TERMINAL LAYOUT PHYSICAL VALUES SLCT LVR POSI Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P Selector lever in “R” position R Selector lever in “D” and “DS” positions D Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR 6 Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR 5 Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR 4 Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR 3 Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR 2 Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR 1 GEAR During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th NEXT GR POSI During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th SHIFT MODE Driving with the D position 0 or 3 Driving with the manual mode 4 or 8 D/C PARTS At 1GR - 2GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL FR/B PARTS At control fixed to 1GR FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL 2346/B PARTS At control fixed to 1GR FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL 2346B/DC PARTS At 2GR - 3GR - 4GR shift control FAIL Other than the above NOTFAIL N IDLE STATUS*1 Idle neutral control is active ON Other than the above OFF Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) SCIA1658E Terminal (Wire color) Description Condition Value (Approx.) + − Signal name Input/ Output 1 (Y) Ground Power supply Input Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF 0 V TM-298 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] TCM *1: LHD models *2: RHD models Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005321627 TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd failsafe and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged. Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case, turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern. Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-118, "Diagnosis Flow". FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION 2 (R) Ground Power supply (Memory back-up) Input Always Battery voltage 3 (L) — CAN-H Input/ Output — — 4 (V) — K-line (CONSULTIII signal) Input/ Output — — 5 (B) Ground Ground Output Always 0 V 6 (Y)*1 (G)*2 Ground Power supply Input Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Ignition switch OFF 0 V 7 (R)*1 (SB)*2 Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ON Selector lever in “R” position. 0 V Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage 8 (P) — CAN-L Input/ Output — — 9 (LG) Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. Battery voltage Selector lever in other positions. 0 V 10 (B) Ground Ground Output Always 0 V Terminal (Wire color) Description Condition Value (Approx.) + − Signal name Input/ Output 1st Fail-Safe The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to 2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped. 2nd Fail-Safe The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunctioning parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured. Final Fail-Safe • Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving. • The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control. TCM TM-299 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P DTC Vehicle condition Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled P0705 — • Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting can be performed) • 30 km/h (19MPH) or less • Lock-up is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Shift position indicator is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is disabled) • Back-up lamp is OFF • Large shift shock — • Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting can be performed) • 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less • Lock-up is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Shift position indicator is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is disabled) • Back-up lamp is OFF • Large shift shock P0710 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed Between • Manual mode is prohibited the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0717 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed Between • Manual mode is prohibited the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0720 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • Only downshift can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • A vehicle speed signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded as an effective signal — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited • A vehicle speed signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. is regarded as an effective signal — P0729 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P1734 Neutral malfunction between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 and 7 • Locks in 4GR • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral — • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited Other than the above • Driving with the gear ratio between 1GR and 2GR • Driving with the gear ratio between 2GR and 3GR • Locks in 3GR • Locks in 4GR • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited TM-300 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] TCM P0730 — • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P0740 — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited P0744 — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited — • Lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited P0750 P0775 P0795 P2713 P2722 P2731 P2807 — • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR • Manual mode is prohibited — • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P0780 — • Manual mode is prohibited • Neutral — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P1585 — Idle neutral control is prohibited — Idle neutral control is prohibited P1705 — • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed is prohibited • Upshift when accelerator pedal is released is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited P1730 — • Neutral • Manual mode is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited • Locks in 1GR • The shifting between the gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 can be performed • The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited P1815 Paddle switch malfunction Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited Gate switch malfunction Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited Malfunction of both switches Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited U0300 U1000 Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Manual mode is prohibited — • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed • Line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure • Manual mode is prohibited Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 • Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited — P0720 and P1721 — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR DTC Vehicle condition Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe TCM TM-301 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Protection Control INFOID:0000000005321628 The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured. The TCM has the following protection control. REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. 1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR. TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic substrate in TCM reaches the high temperature. DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000005321629 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per the following list. Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Control at malfunction Neutral Normal return condition • Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less and • Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less Vehicle behavior • The torque transmission cannot be performed • There is a shock just before a vehicle stop Malfunction detection condition • Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR and • Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH) Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction Vehicle behavior Does not exist Malfunction detection condition TCM electronic substrate temperature • 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds or • 150°C (302°F) Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less Normal return condition • TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F) and • Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8 Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference 1 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-320 TM-302 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] TCM DTC Index INFOID:0000000005321630 NOTE: • If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per the following list. Refer to TM-108, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart". • The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD). Refer to TM-92, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)". 2 P0615 STARTER RELAY TM-321 P0705 T/M RANGE SWITCH A TM-323 P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-324 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-326 P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-327 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-344 P0745 PC SOLENOID A TM-346 P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A TM-347 P0775 PC SOLENOID B TM-348 P0795 PC SOLENOID C TM-350 P2713 PC SOLENOID D TM-366 P2722 PC SOLENOID E TM-367 P2731 PC SOLENOID F TM-368 P2807 PC SOLENOID G TM-369 3 P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-331 P0730 INCORRECT GR RATIO TM-333 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-334 P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-336 P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-338 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-340 P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-342 P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-345 P0780 SHIFT TM-349 P1730 INTERLOCK TM-357 P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-359 4 U0300 CAN COMM DATA TM-319 P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-329 P1585 G SENSOR TM-351 P1705 TP SENSOR TM-354 P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TM-355 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-361 Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) DTC*2 MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- Reference SULT-III or GST CONSULT-III only “TRANSMISSION” STARTER RELAY — P0615 TM-321 T/M RANGE SWITCH A P0705 P0705 TM-323 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 P0710 TM-324 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 P0717 TM-326 TCM TM-303 < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P *1: Refer to TM-284, "Diagnosis Description". *2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5. OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 TM-327 ENGINE SPEED — P0725 TM-329 6GR INCORRECT RATIO P0729 P0729 TM-331 INCORRECT GR RATIO P0730 P0730 TM-333 1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 P0731 TM-334 2GR INCORRECT RATIO P0732 P0732 TM-336 3GR INCORRECT RATIO P0733 P0733 TM-338 4GR INCORRECT RATIO P0734 P0734 TM-340 5GR INCORRECT RATIO P0735 P0735 TM-342 TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 P0740 TM-344 TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 P0744 TM-345 PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 TM-346 SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 P0750 TM-347 PC SOLENOID B P0775 P0775 TM-348 SHIFT P0780 P0780 TM-349 PC SOLENOID C P0795 P0795 TM-350 G SENSOR — P1585 TM-351 TP SENSOR — P1705 TM-354 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 TM-355 INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 TM-357 7GR INCORRECT RATIO P1734 P1734 TM-359 M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 TM-361 PC SOLENOID D P2713 P2713 TM-366 PC SOLENOID E P2722 P2722 TM-367 PC SOLENOID F P2731 P2731 TM-368 PC SOLENOID G P2807 P2807 TM-369 CAN COMM DATA — U0300 TM-319 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 TM-320 Items (CONSULT-III screen terms) DTC*2 MI*1, “ENGINE” with CON- Reference SULT-III or GST CONSULT-III only “TRANSMISSION” TM-304 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] A/T CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM LHD LHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005318349 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". A/T CONTROL SYSTEM TM-305 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O RHD P RHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005318350 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". JCDWM1017GB TM-306 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] A/T CONTROL SYSTEM JCDWM1018GB A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-307 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000005318351 For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if notdescribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information". FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC JCDWM1021GB TM-308 < WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC JCDWM1022GB DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW TM-309 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Diagnosis Flow INFOID:0000000005288301 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM 1. Refer to TM-310, "Question sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings in the vehicle. 2. Check the following: - Service history - Harnesses and connectors malfunction. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC 1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists. 2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations. - Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out the data CONSULT-III and affix it to the Work Order Sheet.) - Erase DTCs. - Check the relationship between the cause that is clarified with DTC and the malfunction information described by the customer. TM-387, "Symptom Table" is effective. 3. Check the information of related service bulletins and others also. Do malfunction information and DTC exist? Malfunction information and DTC exists. >>GO TO 3. Malfunction information exists, but no DTC. >>GO TO 4. No malfunction information, but DTC exists. >>GO TO 5. 3.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Check any malfunction described by a customer, except those with DTC on the vehicle. Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-298, "Fail-Safe". When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-310, "Question sheet". Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer occurs. >> GO TO 5. 4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle. Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-298, "Fail-Safe". When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-310, "Question sheet". Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer occurs. >> GO TO 6. 5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again. Refer to TM-301, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the order for performing the diagnosis. NOTE: If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data. Is any DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 7. TM-310 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW NO >> Check according to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". 6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM” Use TM-387, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start performing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms. >> GO TO 8. 7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts. Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary. >> GO TO 8. 8.FINAL CHECK Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed. Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer, referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4. Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced? YES-1 >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 5. YES-2 >> Malfunction symptom is reproduced: GO TO 6. NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased. Question sheet INFOID:0000000005288302 DESCRIPTION There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions properly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved. In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. Therefore, it is important to understand the symptom and status well enough by asking the customer about the concerns carefully. In order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the question sheet referring to the question points. WORKSHEET SAMPLE SEF907L Question Sheet Customer name MR/MS Engine # Manuf. Date Incident Date VIN Model & Year In Service Date Trans. Mileage Km / Mile DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW TM-311 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Symptoms Vehicle does not move ( Any position Particular position ) No up shift ( 1GR → 2GR 2GR → 3GR 3GR → 4GR 4GR → 5GR 5GR → 6GR 6GR → 7GR) No down shift ( 7GR → 6GR 6GR → 5GR 5GR → 4GR 4GR → 3GR 3GR → 2GR 2GR → 1GR) Lock-up malfunction Shift point too high or too low Shift shock or slip Noise or vibration No kick down No pattern select Others Frequency All the time Under certain conditions Sometimes ( times a day) Weather conditions Not affected Weather Fine Clouding Raining Snowing Other ( ) Temp. Hot Warm Cool Cold Temp. [Approx. °C ( °F)] Humidity High Middle Low Transmission conditions Not affected Cold During warm-up After warm-up Engine speed ( rpm) Road conditions Not affected In town In suburbs Freeway Off road (Up / Down) Driving conditions Not affected At starting While idling While engine racing At racing While cruising While accelerating While decelerating While turning (Right / Left) Vehicle speed [ km/h ( MPH)] Other conditions Question Sheet TM-312 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY Description INFOID:0000000005318526 G sensor calibration must be performed when replacing transmission assembly. Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005318527 1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE 1. Park the vehicle on a flat road. 2. Adjust pressure in all tires to the specified value. Refer to WT-84, "Tire Air Pressure". >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM CALIBRATION With CONSULT-III 1. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Touch “START”. CAUTION: • Never start the engine. • Never give any motion to the vehicle during the calibration. Is “completed” displayed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Perform the calibration again. 3.CHECK DTC With CONSULT-III Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1585” detected? YES >> Refer to TM-351, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Calibration end. G SENSOR CALIBRATION TM-313 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P G SENSOR CALIBRATION Description INFOID:0000000005318528 G sensor calibration must be performed when the following operation is performed. • Removal and installation or replacement of G sensor • Replacement of transmission assembly • Replacement of ECM Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000005318529 1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE 1. Park the vehicle on a flat road. 2. Adjust pressure in all tires to the specified value. Refer to WT-84, "Tire Air Pressure". >> GO TO 2. 2.PERFORM CALIBRATION With CONSULT-III 1. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Touch “START”. CAUTION: • Never start the engine. • Never give any motion to the vehicle during the calibration. Is “completed” displayed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Perform the calibration again. 3.CHECK DTC With CONSULT-III Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1585” detected? YES >> Refer to TM-351, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Calibration end. TM-314 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] A/T FLUID A/T FLUID Changing INFOID:0000000005321668 CAUTION: • Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF. • Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty. • When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust. 1. Step 1 a. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe (310811EA5A) (B). 2. Step 2 a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less. b. Lift up the vehicle. c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF. d. When the ATF starts to drip, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan. NOTE: Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet. e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole. CAUTION: Tighten the charging pipe by hand. g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe. CAUTION: Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the charging pipe. h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF. i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe, and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan. CAUTION: Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from the oil pan. j. Lift down the vehicle. k. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes. l. Stop the engine. 3. Step 3 a. Repeat “Step 2”. 4. Final Step a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less. b. Lift up the vehicle. c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF. Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to TM-410, "General Specification". JSDIA1334ZZ JSDIA1335ZZ A/T FLUID TM-315 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P d. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the drain plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-400, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole. CAUTION: Tighten the charging pipe by hand. g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe. CAUTION: Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the charging pipe. h. Fill approximately 3 liters (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF. i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe, and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan. CAUTION: Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from the oil pan. j. Lift down the vehicle. k. Start the engine. l. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F). NOTE: The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT-III. m. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake. n. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position. o. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and then remove the overflow plug from the oil pan. p. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM- 400, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Never reuse overflow plug. Adjustment INFOID:0000000005321669 CAUTION: • Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF. • Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty. • When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust. • Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking with CONSULT-III when the ATF level adjustment is performed. 1. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe (310811EA5A) (B). 2. Start the engine. 3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F). NOTE: The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT-III. 4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake. 5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position. 6. Lift up the vehicle. JSDIA1335ZZ Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to TM-410, "General Specification". JSDIA1334ZZ TM-316 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] A/T FLUID 7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission. 8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. 9. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole. CAUTION: Tighten the charging pipe by hand. 10. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe. CAUTION: Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the charging pipe. 11. Fill approximately 0.5 liters (1/2 lmp qt) of the ATF. 12. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the charging pipe and the bucket pump hose. If the ATF does not leak, refill the ATF. 13. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-400, "Exploded View". CAUTION: Never reuse overflow plug. JSDIA1335ZZ STALL TEST TM-317 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P STALL TEST Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000005288333 INSPECTION 1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. 2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary. 3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. 4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position. 5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake. 6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test. 7. Shift the selector lever to “N” position. 8. Cool down the ATF. CAUTION: Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute. 9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position. JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST O: Stall speed within standard value position H: Stall speed higher than standard value L: Stall speed lower than standard value Stall test standard value position Stall speed : Refer to TM-411, "Stall Speed". Selector lever position Possible location of malfunction “D” and “M” “R” Stall speed H O • Low brake • 1st one-way clutch • 2nd one-way clutch O H • Reverse brake • 1st one-way clutch • 2nd one-way clutch L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch H H • Line pressure low Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR Direct clutch slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR High and low reverse clutch slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR Input clutch slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 5 → 6 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 6 → 7 Slipping in 7GR Front brake slippage TM-318 < BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] A/T POSITION A/T POSITION Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969925 INSPECTION 1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). 2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. 3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and the A/T body. 5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly is shown in the figure. 6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position without applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check button operation for sticking. 7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps do not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in the “P” or “N” position. 8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P” position, engine can be started even when selector lever is moved forward and backward.) 9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position. 10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should be indicated on the combination meter. In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the manual mode. (Only while driving.) ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen nut ( ). 2. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position. 3. While pressing lower lever (A) toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position direction), tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". JSDIA0790GB JPDIA0884ZZ U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA TM-319 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA Description INFOID:0000000005775083 The amount of data transmitted from each control unit is read. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005775084 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “U0300” detected? YES >> Go to TM-319, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005775085 1.CHECK CONTROL UNIT Check the number of control units replaced before detecting “U0300”. Is the number of replaced control units one? YES >> Since the replaced control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifications. NO >> GO TO 2. 2.INSPECTION CONTROL UNIT With CONSULT-III 1. Remove one of the replaced control units. 2. Install the previous control unit mounted before replacement. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “U0300” detected? YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch to check the other control units in the same method. NO >> Since the removed control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifications. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause U0300 Internal Control Module Software Incompatibility When the amount of data transmitted from each control unit is smaller than the specified amount. Control units other than TCM. TM-320 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000005318673 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342376 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. 3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “U1000” detected? YES >> Go to TM-320, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005342377 Go to LAN-29, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause U1000 CAN Communication Line TCM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more. • Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted.) • TCM P0615 STARTER RELAY TM-321 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0615 STARTER RELAY Description INFOID:0000000005318674 TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342378 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Shift the selector lever to “P” and “N” positions. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. 3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P0615” detected? YES >> Go to TM-321, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969803 1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to STR-12, "Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM (WITH GASOLINE ENGINE) -". NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0615 Starter Relay Circuit The starter monitor value is OFF when the ignition switch is ON at the “P” and “N” positions. • Harness or connectors (Starter relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted.) • Starter relay circuit IPDM E/R connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E5 30 Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions. Battery voltage Selector lever in other positions. 0 V TM-322 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0615 STARTER RELAY Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 2) Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F51 9 E5 30 Existed A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal F51 9 Not existed P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A TM-323 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342379 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ACCELE POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Shift the selector lever throughout the entire shift position from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each position for 2 seconds or more) 4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 5. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0705” detected? YES >> Go to TM-323, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969806 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected if... Possible cause P0705 Transmission Range Switch A Circuit (PRNDL Input) The TCM detects an ON/OFF combination pattern other than that of the transmission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4. (For ON/ OFF combination patterns of transmission range switches, refer to TM-239, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch".) • Harness or connectors (Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.) • Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8 VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-324 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342380 DTC DETECTION LOGIC Except for Russia (VQ37VHR) For Russia (VQ37VHR) and Europe (V9X) DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0710 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor A Circuit The A/T fluid temperature sensor is −40 °C (−40 °F) or less for 5 seconds while driving the vehicle at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor The A/T fluid temperature sensor is 180 °C (356 °F) or more for 5 seconds. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is short.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor The fluid temperature sensor is in the following conditions while driving the vehicle at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is stuck.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor For 4 minutes : 15 °C – 20 °C (59 °F – 68 °F) : 10 °C – 15 °C (50 °F – 59 °F) : 5 °C – 10 °C (41 °F – 50 °F) : 0 °C – 5 °C (32 °F – 41 °F) For 7 minutes : −5 °C – 0 °C (23 °F – 32 °F) : −10 °C – −5 °C (14 °F – 23 °F) : −15 °C – −10 °C (5 °F – 14 °F) : −20 °C – −15 °C (−4 °F – 5 °F) For 14 minutes : −40 °C – −20 °C (−40 °F – −4 °F) DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0710 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor A Circuit TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is -40 °C (-40 °F) or less continuously for 5 seconds while driving at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is 180 °C (356 °F) or more continuously for 5 seconds. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is short.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor TCM judges the following conditions while driving the vehicle at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more: • The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by 1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 14 minutes when A/T fluid temperature is -20 °C (-4 °F) or less. • The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by 1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 7 minutes when A/T fluid temperature is between -19 °C (-2 °F) and 0 °C (32 °F). • The time required for A/T fluid temperature to rise by 1 °C (1.8 °F) exceeds 4 minutes when A/T fluid temperature is between 1 °C (34 °F) and 20 °C (68 °F). • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is stuck.) • A/T fluid temperature sensor P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A TM-325 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 14 minutes or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0710” detected? YES >> Go to TM-325, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969809 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SLCT LVR POSI : D VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-326 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342424 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “GEAR”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “W/O THL POS” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. CAUTION: Keep the same gear position. NOTE: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0717” detected? YES >> Go to TM-326, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969812 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0717 Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A Circuit No Signal The revolution of input speed sensor 1 and/or 2 is 270 rpm or less. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open.) • Input speed sensor 1 and/or 2 SLCT LVR POSI : D GEAR : 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) W/O THL POS : ON ENGINE SPEED : More than 1,500 rpm P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-327 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342425 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0720” detected? YES >> Go to TM-327, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969815 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0720 Output Speed Sensor Circuit • The vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor is 5 km/h (3MPH) or less when the vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/ C amp. to TCM is 20 km/h or more. (Only when starts after the ignition switch is turned ON.) • The vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM does not decrease despite the 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more of deceleration in vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor. when the vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor is 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more and the vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM is 24 (15 MPH) or more. • Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open.) • Output speed sensor ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more TM-328 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-329 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0725 ENGINE SPEED Description INFOID:0000000005318675 The engine speed signal is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM via CAN communication line. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342463 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P0725” detected? YES >> Go to TM-329, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969818 1.CHECK DTC OF ECM With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-1049, "DTC Index". 2.CHECK DTC OF TCM With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC other than “P0725” detected? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index". DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit • TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from the ECM. • The engine speed is more less 150 rpm even if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/ h (7 MPH). Harness or connectors (ECM to TCM circuit is open or shorted.) SLCT LVR POSI : D VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 10km/h (7 MPH) TM-330 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0725 ENGINE SPEED 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-331 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000005342579 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 6GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342488 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-332, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “6TH GR FNCTN P0729” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • 0.915 or more • 0.813 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) TM-332 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0729” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 302, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0729” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-332, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0729” is detected)>>Go to TM-332, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969821 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 6th ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 6th Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO TM-333 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO Description INFOID:0000000005318677 • TCM detects a high-rpm state of the under drive sun gear. • The number of revolutions of the under drive sun gear is calculated with the input speed sensor 1 and 2. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342580 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-333, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”. 3. Drive vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P0730” detected? YES >> Go to TM-333, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969824 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0730 Incorrect Gear Ratio The revolution of under drive sun gear is 8,000 rpm or more. NOTE: Not detected when in “P” or “N” position and during a shift to “P” or “N” position. • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Input speed sensor 2 ENGINE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data. VEHICLE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data. B/FUEL SCHDL Same value as the Freeze Frame Data. TM-334 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000005318678 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342708 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-335, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0731 Gear 1 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • 5.180 or more • 4.594 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-335 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0731” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 302, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0731” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-335, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0731” is detected)>>Go to TM-335, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969827 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 1st ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 1st Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-336 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000005318679 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 2GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342709 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-337, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0732 Gear 2 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • 3.360 or more • 2.980 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-337 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0732” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 302, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0732” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-337, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0732” is detected)>>Go to TM-337, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969830 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 2nd ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 2nd Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-338 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000005318680 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 3GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342747 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-339, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0733 Gear 3 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • 2.148 or more • 1.906 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-339 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0733” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 302, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0733” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-339, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0733” is detected)>>Go to TM-339, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969833 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 3rd ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 3rd Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-340 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000005318681 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 4GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342785 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-341, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0734 Gear 4 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • 1.496 or more • 1.328 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-341 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 302, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0734” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-341, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0734” is detected)>>Go to TM-341, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969836 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 4th ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 4th Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-342 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000005318682 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342787 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-343, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “5TH GR FNCTN P0735” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0735 Gear 5 Incorrect Ratio The gear ratio is: • 1.060 or more • 0.940 or less • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Output speed sensor • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F) P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-343 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0735” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 302, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0735” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-343, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P0735” is detected)>>Go to TM-343, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969839 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 5th ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 5th Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-344 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342862 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 30 seconds or more. NOTE: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P0740” detected? YES >> Go to TM-344, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969842 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0740 Torque Converter Clutch Circuit/ Open A DTC is set if the torque converter clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the torque converter clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 2nd VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-345 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER Description INFOID:0000000005318683 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342864 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more. NOTE: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P0744” detected? YES >> Go to TM-345, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969845 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0744 Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Intermittent The lock-up is not performed in spite of within the lock-up area. • Harness or connectors • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve • Torque converter • Input speed sensor 1, 2 • Hydraulic control circuit MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 2nd VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more TM-346 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342902 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Wait for 5 seconds or more at idle speed in “N” position. 3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0745” detected? YES >> Go to TM-346, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969848 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0745 Pressure Control Solenoid A The line pressure solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the line pressure solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Line pressure solenoid valve P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A TM-347 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342903 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0750” detected? YES >> Go to TM-347, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969851 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0750 Shift Solenoid A • The anti-interlock solenoid valve monitor value is ON when the anti-interlock solenoid valve command value is OFF. • The anti-interlock solenoid valve monitor value is OFF when the anti-interlock solenoid valve command value is ON. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Anti-interlock solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 1st VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-348 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342904 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0775” detected? YES >> Go to TM-348, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969854 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0775 Pressure Control Solenoid B The input clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the input clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Input clutch solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 1st VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P0780 SHIFT TM-349 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P0780 SHIFT Description INFOID:0000000005318684 The TCM detects the malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342942 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “ACCELE POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0780” detected? YES >> Go to TM-349, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969857 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0780 Shift Error • When shifting from 3GR to 4GR with the selector lever in “D” position, the gear ratio does not shift to 1.412 (gear ratio of 4GR) • When shifting from 5GR to 6GR or 6GR to 7GR, the engine speed exceeds the prescribed speed. • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • Hydraulic control circuit SLCT LVR POSI : D ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8 GEAR : 3rd → 4th TM-350 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342980 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “CONSULT-III”. Is “P0795” detected? YES >> Go to TM-350, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969860 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P0795 Pressure Control Solenoid C The front brake solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the front brake solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Front brake solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 7th VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P1585 G SENSOR TM-351 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P1585 G SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005342981 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate side. 4. Start up in M1, and then upshift M2. 5. Accelerate the vehicle speed regularly from approximately 20 km/h (13 MPH) to approximately 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 8 seconds in M2. 6. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1585” detected? YES >> Go to TM-351, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969863 1.CHECK G SENSOR SIGNAL 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Select “G SEN SLOPE” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 4. Swing the vehicle body and check that the value varies between −40.45 – 40.45%. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 1) DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1585 G Sensor Circuit • The output voltage value of G sensor is outside the standard for the specified period of time caused by open circuit, short circuit, or malfunction of G sensor. • The movable gauging component of G sensor is stuck for the specified period of time during driving. • G sensor • Harness or connector (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Monitor item Condition Status G SEN SLOPE Level road 0% Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%) Downhill slope Negative value (minimum −40.45%) TM-352 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P1585 G SENSOR 1. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Touch “Erase”. 3. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to TM-313, "Special Repair Requirement". 4. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-351, "DTC Logic". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END. NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". 3.CHECK G SENSOR POWER 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect G sensor connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between G sensor vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 8. 4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM connectors. 3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and G sensor vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (PART 2) Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK G SENSOR 1. Remove G sensor. Refer to TM-399, "Exploded View". 2. Reconnect all the connectors. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. G sensor vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal B248 3 5 V ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M160 107 B248 2 Existed 98 1 ECM vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M160 107 Not existed 98 P1585 G SENSOR TM-353 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 4. Check voltage between ECM connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Replace G sensor. Refer to TM-399, "Exploded View". 7.PERFORM CALIBRATION (PART 2) 1. Install G sensor. Refer to TM-399, "Exploded View". 2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Touch “Erase”. 4. Perform calibration of G sensor. Refer to TM-313, "Special Repair Requirement". 5. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-351, "DTC Logic". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END. NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". 8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM connectors. 3. Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and G sensor vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND G SENSOR (SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT) (PART 2) Check continuity between ECM vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check ECM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to EC-700, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004969864 G sensor calibration must be performed when removing and installing or replacing the G sensor. 1.PERFORM CALIBRATION Perform G sensor calibration. >> Refer to TM-313, "Special Repair Requirement". : Direction of gravitational force ECM connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal M160 98 Vertical (−1G) (A) 1.17 V Horizontal (B) 2.5 V Vertical (1G) (C) 3.83 V SCIA8343J ECM vehicle side harness connector G sensor vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M160 103 B248 3 Existed ECM vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Terminal Connector M160 103 Not existed TM-354 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P1705 TP SENSOR P1705 TP SENSOR DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343050 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1705” detected? YES >> Go to TM-354, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969867 1.CHECK DTC OF ECM With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-1049, "DTC Index". 2.CHECK DTC OF TCM With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC other than “P1705” detected? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index". 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1705 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Signal Circuit TCM detects the difference between two accelerator pedal position signals received from ECM via CAN communication. Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) SLCT LVR POSI : D VHCL/S SE-A/T : 5 km/h (3 MPH) or more P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TM-355 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Description INFOID:0000000005318738 The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM via CAN communication line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use the vehicle speed signal. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343051 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. • Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “VHCL/S SE-AT” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION” 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1721” detected? YES >> Go to TM-356, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1721 Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit • The vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM is 5 km/ h (3MPH) or less when the vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor is 20 km/h or more. (Only when starts after the ignition switch is turned ON.) • The vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor does not decrease despite the 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more of deceleration in vehicle speed received from the unified meter and A/C amp. when the vehicle speed transmitted from the unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM is 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more and the vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor is 24 (15 MPH) or more. Harness or connectors (Sensor circuit is open or shorted.) VHCL/S SE-A/T : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more TM-356 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969870 1.CHECK DTC OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “METER/M&A”. Is any DTC detected? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-116, "DTC Index". 2.CHECK DTC OF TCM With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Is any DTC other than “P1721” detected? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index". 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P1730 INTERLOCK TM-357 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P1730 INTERLOCK Description INFOID:0000000005318739 Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343090 DTC DETECTION LOGIC NOTE: When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, an input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is not an input speed sensor malfunction. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-358, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle the following condition. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P1730” detected? YES >> Go to TM-358, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Judgment of Interlock INFOID:0000000004969873 Refer to TM-298, "Fail-Safe". DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1730 Interlock The output speed sensor detects the deceleration of 12 km/ h (7 MPH) or more for 1 second. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Input clutch solenoid valve • Direct clutch solenoid valve • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve • Front brake solenoid valve • Low brake solenoid valve • 2346 brake solenoid valve • Anti-interlock solenoid valve • Each clutch • Hydraulic control circuit SLCT LVR POSI : D GEAR : 1st through 7th TM-358 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P1730 INTERLOCK Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969874 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-359 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO Description INFOID:0000000005318740 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 7GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343091 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: • “TM-360, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. • Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause secondary malfunction. • Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range. With GST 1. Start the engine. 2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Is ATF temperature within specified range? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF. 3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1) With CONSULT-III 1. Select “7TH GR FNCTN P1734” in “DTC & SRT confirmation” in “TRANSMISSION”. 2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO 3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. CAUTION: When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P1734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM- 302, "DTC Index". With GST 1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. 2. Check DTC. Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P1734” detected? YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again. YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-360, "Diagnosis Procedure". YES-4 (“P1734” is detected)>>Go to TM-360, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 4. 4.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 2) 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969877 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. GEAR : 7th ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more Selector lever : “M” position Gear position : 7th Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-361 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P1815 M-MODE SWITCH DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343162 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “MANU MODE SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Maintain the following each conditions more than 60 seconds. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Is “P1815” detected? YES >> Go to TM-361, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969880 1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”, “SFT UP ST SW” and “SFT DWN ST SW” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P1815 Manual Mode Switch Circuit • TCM monitors manual mode, non manual mode, up or down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossible input pattern occurs 2 second or more. • When shift up/down signal of paddle shifter continuously remains ON for 60 seconds. • Harness or connectors (These switches circuit is open or shorted.) • Mode select switch (Into A/T shift selector) • Position select switch (Into A/ T shift selector) • Paddle shifter SLCT LVR POSI : D MANU MODE SW : ON TM-362 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P1815 M-MODE SWITCH Without CONSULT-III Drive the vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the indication of the shift position indicator matches with the actual gear position. 1. Shift the selector lever to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR. 2. Shift the selector lever to − side, and then decelerate from7GR to 1GR. 3. Shift the paddle shifter (shift-up) to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR. 4. Shift the paddle shifter (shift-down) to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR. Which item is abnormal? Manual mode switch>>GO TO 2. Paddle shifter>>GO TO 7. 2.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 4. 3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-365, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Item Monitor Item Condition Status Manual mode switch MANU MODE SW Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON Other than the above OFF NON M-MODE SW Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF Other than the above ON UP SW LEVER Selector lever is shifted to + side ON Other than the above OFF DOWN SW LEVER Selector lever is shifted to − side ON Other than the above OFF Paddle shifter SFT UP ST SW Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled ON Other than the above OFF SFT DWN ST SW Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled ON Other than the above OFF A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal + − M137 1 4 Battery voltage 2 3 5 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-363 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1) 1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2) Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> GO TO 9. 8.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 4 Existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 1 M66 10 Existed 2 25 3 5 5 11 A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 1 Not existed 2 3 5 Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal + − M38 3 1 Battery voltage M39 TM-364 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P1815 M-MODE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-365, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)]" and TM-365, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)]". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 10. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1) 1. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector. 2. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 11. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 2) Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 13. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 13.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. 1. Reconnect all the connectors. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Select “M RANGE SW”, “NM RANGE SW”, “AT SFT UP SW”, “AT SFT DWN SW”, “ST SFT UP SW” and “ST SFT DWN SW” in “Data Monitor” in “METER/M&A”. Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M38 1 Existed M39 Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M38 3 M66 6 Existed M39 26 Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M38 3 Not existed M39 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-365 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 4. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item. Refer to MWI-94, "Reference Value". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-149, "Exploded View". Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000004969881 1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)] INFOID:0000000004969882 1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-up) connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-398, "Exploded View". Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)] INFOID:0000000004969883 1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-down) connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-398, "Exploded View". A/T shift selector connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal M137 1 4 Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Existed Other than the above Not existed 2 Selector lever is shifted to − side Existed Other than the above Not existed 3 Selector lever is shifted to + side Existed Other than the above Not existed 5 Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Not existed Other than the above Existed Paddle shifter (shift-up) connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal M38 1 3 Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled Existed Other than the above Not existed Paddle shifter (shift-down) connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal M39 1 3 Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled Existed Other than the above Not existed TM-366 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343204 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P2713” detected? YES >> Go to TM-366, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969886 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P2713 Pressure Control Solenoid D The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 3rd VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E TM-367 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343272 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P2722” detected? YES >> Go to TM-367, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969889 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P2722 Pressure Control Solenoid E The low brake solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the low brake solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Low brake solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 1st VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-368 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343273 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P2731” detected? YES >> Go to TM-368, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969892 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P2731 Pressure Control Solenoid F The 2346 brake solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the 2346 brake solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • 2346 brake solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 2nd VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G TM-369 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G DTC Logic INFOID:0000000005343274 DTC DETECTION LOGIC DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. 1.PRECONDITIONING If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC DETECTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more. 4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. Is “P2807” detected? YES >> Go to TM-369, "Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969895 1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. DTC Trouble diagnosis name DTC is detected if... Possible cause P2807 Pressure Control Solenoid G The direct clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.4 A or less when the direct clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A. • Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) • Direct clutch solenoid valve BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more MANU MODE SW : ON GEAR : 1st VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more TM-370 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004969897 1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. 3. Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 4. 2.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 2) Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 5. 3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1) Check the following. • Harness for short or open between battery positive terminal and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal 2. Refer to PG-16, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -". • Battery • 10A fuse (No.36, located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box). Refer to PG-230, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Fuse and Fusible Link Arrangement". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal F51 2 Always Battery voltage A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal F51 1 Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage Turn ignition switch OFF 0 V 6 Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage Turn ignition switch OFF 0 V A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal F51 5 Existed 10 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT TM-371 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY (PART 2) Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2) Check the following. • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". • Ignition switch • 10A fuse (No.43, located in the IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-232, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". • IPDM E/R Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E7 58 F51 1 Existed 6 A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E51 1 Not existed 6 TM-372 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT Description INFOID:0000000005332272 TCM transmits a shift position signal and a manual mode indicator signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication line. While the vehicle is running, the unified meter and A/C amp. displays a shift position on the combination meter, according to these signals. Component Function Check INFOID:0000000005343365 1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1. Start the engine. 2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the shift position indicator mutually coincide. 3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the shift position indicator mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to TM-372, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005343367 1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-III CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. 3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N”, “D” and “DS”) and the indication of the “SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide. Refer to TM-292, "Reference Value". 4. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the “SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Refer to TM-292, "Reference Value". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.]>>•Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-365, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)". • Check A/T main system. Refer to TM-298, "Fail-Safe". - Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index". NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>•Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index". NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>•Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-302, "DTC Index". NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator)>>•Check the unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-6, "Work flow". SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-373 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004969903 1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position. 3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released. Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position? YES >> Go to TM-373, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 2) Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed. Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to TM-373, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure". FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005371146 1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect shift lock relay. 3. Check voltage between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 10. 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 1) Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY Check shift lock relay. Refer to TM-377, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2) 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Shift lock relay harness connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E52 2 Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage Released brake pedal. 0 V Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E52 1 Existed TM-374 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> GO TO 20. 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2) Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 2) Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND SHIFT LOCK UNIT 1. Disconnect shift lock unit connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E52 5 Battery voltage Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E52 3 E137 8 Existed Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E52 3 Not existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 4 Existed A/T shift selector connector Shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 8 M222 3 Existed 4 4 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-375 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 9.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID 1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-202, "Exploded View". 2. Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-377, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 10.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 3) 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. 2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 15. NO >> GO TO 11. 11.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) 1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector. 2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 13. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 13.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1) Check the following. • Harness for short or open between battery and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-16, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -". • Battery • 10A fuse [No.7, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". • Fuse block (J/B) Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 14. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 14.CHECK DTC OF ICC Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E110 3 Battery voltage Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E103 8F E110 3 Existed Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E103 8F Not existed TM-376 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM With CONSULT-III Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ICC”. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to CCS-293, "DTC Index". NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". 15.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-378, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 18. NO >> GO TO 16. 16.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD), BR-60, "Inspection and Adjustment" (RHD). >> GO TO 17. 17.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-378, "FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-71, "Exploded View" (RHD). 18.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 1) Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 19. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 19.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 2) Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 14. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 20.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector. 3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal. Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E110 4 E52 2 Existed Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E110 4 Not existed SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-377 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 21. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 21.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 22. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 22.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2) Check the following. • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". • Ignition switch • 10A fuse [No.3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". • Fuse block (J/B) Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000005371147 1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is activated. CAUTION: Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. Can the lock plate be moved up and down? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay) INFOID:0000000005371148 1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY Check continuity between shift lock relay terminals 3 and 5. CAUTION: Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E103 4F E52 5 Existed Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E103 4F Not existed Shift lock unit connector Condition Status Connector Terminal + (fuse) − M222 3 4 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 3 and 4. Shift lock solenoid operates TM-378 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace shift lock relay. FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000005371149 1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals 3 and 4. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD), BR-71, "Exploded View" (RHD). EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000006057558 1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 1) 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. 3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released. Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position? YES >> Go to TM-378, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure". NO >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 2) Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed. Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to TM-378, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure". EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000006057559 1.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Shift lock relay connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal E52 3 5 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 1 and 2. Existed OFF Not existed Stop lamp switch connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal E110 3 4 Depressed brake pedal. Existed Released brake pedal. Not existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal M137 8 Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage Released brake pedal. 0 V SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-379 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 5. 2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND SHIFT LOCK UNIT 1. Disconnect shift lock unit connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK SHIFT LOCK UNIT 1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 2. Check shift lock unit. Refer to TM-381, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 5.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> GO TO 9. 6.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-381, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> GO TO 12. A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 4 Existed A/T shift selector connector Shift lock unit A/T shift selector side connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 8 M222 3 Existed 4 4 Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal E110 3 Battery voltage TM-380 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM 7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1) Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2) Check continuity between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector. 3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 10. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 10.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 11. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following. • Harness for short or open between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-34, "GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS : Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". • Ignition switch • 10A fuse [No.3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-229, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". • Fuse block (J/B) Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E110 4 M137 8 Existed Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E110 4 Not existed Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal E103 4F E110 3 Existed Fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal E103 4F Not existed SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM TM-381 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 12.CHECK INSTALLATION POSITION OF STOP LAMP SWITCH Adjust stop lamp switch position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD) or BR-60, "Inspection and Adjustment" (RHD). >> GO TO 13. 13.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH (PART 2) Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-381, "EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD) or BR-71, "Exploded View" (RHD). EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Solenoid) INFOID:0000000006057560 1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is activated. CAUTION: Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. Can the lock plate be moved up and down? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000006057561 1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-20, "Exploded View" (LHD) or BR-71, "Exploded View" (RHD). Shift lock unit connector Condition Status Connector Terminal + (fuse) − M222 3 4 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 3 and 4. Shift lock solenoid operates Stop lamp switch connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal E110 3 4 Brake pedal depressed Existed Brake pedal released Not existed TM-382 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR Component Function Check INFOID:0000000005371304 1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check that each position indicator lamp of the selector lever position indicator turns on when shifting the selector lever from “P” to “M” position. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to TM-382, "Diagnosis Procedure". 2.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2) Check that the night illumination of the selector lever position indicator turns on when setting the lighting switch in 1st position. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Go to TM-382, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000005371305 1.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Which item is abnormal? Position indicator lamp>> GO TO 2. Illumination lamp>> GO TO 11. 2.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO 8. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH (PART 1) 1. Disconnect shift position switch connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connector terminals. A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal M137 10 Battery voltage A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 4 Existed SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR TM-383 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1) 1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector. 2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position indicator connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 6.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2) Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connector for damage. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 7.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR Check selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-385, "Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator)". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector Condition Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 4 M221 7 Selector lever in “D” position. Existed 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11 No existed 9 Selector lever in “M” position. Existed 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11 No existed 10 2, 6 Selector lever in “N” and “M” position. Existed 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed 3, 6 Selector lever in “D” position. Existed 2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed 4, 6 Selector lever in “R” position. Existed 2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed 5, 6 Selector lever in “P” position. Existed 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11 No existed Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M221 2 M223 3 Existed 3 4 4 5 5 7 6 6 7 8 9 2 TM-384 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR NO >> Replace damaged parts. 8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 1) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle side harness connector terminal. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 2) Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 10. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 10.CHECK BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL Check BCM input/output signal. Refer to BCS-50, "Reference Value". Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-34, "Intermittent Incident". NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 11.CHECK POWER SOURCE (PART 2) 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 12. NO >> Check illumination circuit. Refer to INL-85, "LHD : Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -" (LHD), INL- 92, "RHD : Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -" (RHD). 12.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH (PART 2) 1. Disconnect shift position switch connector. 2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connector terminals. A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 10 M122 96 Existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Ground Continuity Connector Terminal M137 10 Not existed A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector Condition Voltage (Approx.) Connector Terminal + − M137 7 9 Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR TM-385 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 13. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 13.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1) 1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector. 2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position indicator connector terminals. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 14. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2) Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connector for damage. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator) INFOID:0000000005371306 1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR Check that selector lever position indicator lamps turn on. CAUTION: Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage. A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M137 7 M221 10 Existed 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 No existed 9 11 Existed 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 No existed Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M221 10 M223 1 Existed 11 9 TM-386 < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace the selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". Selector lever position indicator connector Condition Status Connector Terminal + (fuse) − M223 1 9 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 1 and 9. Illumination lamp turns on. 3 8 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 3 and 8. “N” position indicator lamp turns on. 4 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 4 and 8. “D” position indicator lamp turns on. 5 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 5 and 8. “R” position indicator lamp turns on. 7 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 7 and 8. “P” position indicator lamp turns on. 6 2 Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 6 and 2. “M” mode indicator lamp turns on. SYSTEM SYMPTOM TM-387 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM SYMPTOM Symptom Table INFOID:0000000005288321 The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1. CAUTION: If any malfunction occurs in the RE7R01B transmission, replace the A/T assembly. Symptom Diagnostic item Control linkage Output speed sensor Vehicle speed signal Accelerator pedal position sensor Engine speed signal Input speed sensor A/T fluid temperature sensor Transmission range switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve CAN communication TM-318 TM-327 TM-355 TM-354 TM-329 TM-326 TM-324 TM-323 TM-346 TM-344 TM-367 TM-350 TM-366 TM-348 TM-369 TM-368 TM-347 TM-320 Poor performance Driving performance Shift point is high in “D” position. 1 2 3 Shift point is low in “D” position. 1 2 Large shock When shifting gears → “D” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 2 5 → “R” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 5 1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4 2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4 3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4 4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4 5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4 6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4 Downshift when accelerator pedal is depressed 2 1 4 2 2 3 Upshift when accelerator pedal is released 2 1 4 2 2 3 Lock-up 3 1 3 3 3 2 4 Judder Lock-up 2 1 1 4 3 Strange noise In “R” position 2 1 In “N” position 2 1 In “D” position 2 1 Engine at idle 2 1 TM-388 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM SYMPTOM Symptom Diagnostic item Output speed sensor Engine speed signal Input speed sensor A/T fluid temperature sensor Battery voltage Transmission range switch Manual mode switch Stop lamp switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve CAN communication TM-327 TM-329 TM-326 TM-324 TM-370 TM-323 TM-361 TM-378 TM-346 TM-344 TM-367 TM-350 TM-366 TM-348 TM-369 TM-368 TM-347 TM-320 Function trouble Gear does no change “D” position Locks in 1GR 1 1 1 1 Locks in 5GR 1 1GR → 2GR 1 1 1 1 2GR → 3GR 1 3GR → 4GR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4GR → 5GR 1 1 5GR → 6GR 1 6GR → 7GR 1 1 1 1 1 5GR → 4GR 1 4GR → 3GR 1 1 1 3GR → 2GR 1 1 2GR → 1GR 1 1 1 Does not lock-up 1 1 1 1 3 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 “M” position 1GR ⇔ 2GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2GR ⇔ 3GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3GR ⇔ 4GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4GR ⇔ 5GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5GR ⇔ 6GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 6GR ⇔ 7GR 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SYSTEM SYMPTOM TM-389 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Symptom Diagnostic item Control linkage Output speed sensor Engine speed signal Input speed sensor A/T fluid temperature sensor Transmission range switch Manual mode switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve CAN communication TM-318 TM-327 TM-329 TM-326 TM-324 TM-323 TM-361 TM-346 TM-344 TM-367 TM-350 TM-366 TM-348 TM-369 TM-368 TM-347 TM-320 Function trouble Poor shifting Slip When shifting gears 1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2 2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 2 3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2 4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 Engine brake does not work “D” position → “M” position 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 3 “M” position 7GR → 6GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3 6GR → 5GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3 5GR → 4GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 3 4GR → 3GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 3GR → 2GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3 2GR → 1GR 4 4 4 5 3 1 2 2 3 Poor power transmission Slip With selector lever in “D” position, acceleration is extremely poor. 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 With selector lever in “R” position, acceleration is extremely poor. 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 While starting off by accelerating in 1GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 2GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 3GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 4GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2 TM-390 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SYSTEM SYMPTOM Function trouble Poor power transmission Slip While accelerating in 5GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 6GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 While accelerating in 7GR, engine races. 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 Lock-up 3 3 3 4 1 1 2 No creep at all. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Extremely large creep. 1 Symptom Diagnostic item Control linkage Output speed sensor Engine speed signal Input speed sensor A/T fluid temperature sensor Transmission range switch Manual mode switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve CAN communication TM-318 TM-327 TM-329 TM-326 TM-324 TM-323 TM-361 TM-346 TM-344 TM-367 TM-350 TM-366 TM-348 TM-369 TM-368 TM-347 TM-320 SYSTEM SYMPTOM TM-391 < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Symptom Diagnostic item Control linkage Output speed sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor Engine speed signal Battery voltage Transmission range switch Stop lamp switch Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Low brake solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 2346 brake solenoid valve Anti-interlock solenoid valve Starter relay TM-318 TM-327 TM-354 TM-329 TM-370 TM-323 TM-378 TM-346 TM-344 TM-367 TM-350 TM-366 TM-348 TM-369 TM-368 TM-347 TM-321 Function trouble Power transmission cannot be performed Vehicle cannot run in all position. 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Driving is not possible in “D” position. 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Driving is not possible in “R” position. 3 2 1 1 1 Engine stall 3 4 4 5 2 1 Engine stalls when selector lever shifted “N” → “D” or “R”. 3 4 4 2 1 Engine does not start in “N” or “P” position. 3 1 2 1 Engine starts in position other than “N” or “P”. 3 2 1 Poor operation Vehicle does not enter parking condition. 1 2 Parking condition is not cancelled. 1 2 Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2 Vehicle moves forward with the “R” position. 1 2 Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2 Vehicle moves backward with the “D” position. 1 2 TM-392 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] A/T SHIFT SELECTOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A/T SHIFT SELECTOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288337 LHD models JSDIA1353GB A/T SHIFT SELECTOR TM-393 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Indicator plate 4. Selector lever position indicator 5. Harness connector 6. Insert finisher 7. Control rod 8. Dust cover 9. Bracket 10. Dust cover plate 11. Snap pin 12. Washer 13. Collar 14. Clip 15. Pivot pin 16. Insulator 17. Shift lock unit 18. Control device assembly 19. Adapter : Apply multi-purpose grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not describe on the above. TM-394 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] A/T SHIFT SELECTOR RHD models JSDIA1727GB 1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Adapter 4. A/T shift selector assembly 5. Shift lock unit 6. Clip 7. Pivot pin 8. Washer 9. Collar 10. Snap pin 11. Insulator 12. Dust cover plate 13. Bracket 14. Dust cover 15. Control rod 16. Insert finisher 17. Harness connector 18. Selector lever position indicator A/T SHIFT SELECTOR TM-395 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005288338 REMOVAL 1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position. 2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector. 3. Shift the selector lever to “N” position. 4. Remove knob cover (A) below selector lever downward. 5. Pull lock pin (1) out of selector lever knob (2). 6. Remove selector lever knob. 7. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-37, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View". CAUTION: When disconnecting selector lever position indicator connector from shift position switch, never twist or apply an excessive load to the connector. 8. Remove rear ventilator duct 1. Refer to VTL-10, "Exploded View". 9. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector. 10. Remove harness clips from A/T shift selector assembly. 11. Shift the selector lever to “P” position. 12. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts. 13. Slightly lift the A/T shift selector assembly (1) and slide it rightward. Then pull it out in the diagonally right direction. 14. Remove snap pin, washers, insulator, collar and pivot pin from A/T shift selector assembly. 15. Remove adapter from A/T shift selector assembly. 16. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector assembly. 17. Remove dust cover from dust cover plate. 18. Remove shift lock unit from A/T shift selector assembly. 19. Remove brackets from vehicle floor panel. 20. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher assembly. a. Remove indicator assembly from console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-37, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View". b. Remove insert finisher from indicator assembly. c. Remove selector lever position indicator. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing a collar) of the pivot pin. • Apply multi-purpose grease on the surface that the shift lock unit plate slides vertically. • Refer to the followings when installing selector lever knob to A/T shift selector assembly. 1. Insert lock pin to selector lever knob. 2. Install selector lever knob over selector lever until a click is felt. CAUTION: • Install it straight, and never tap or apply any shock to install it. • Never press selector button. 19. Indicator plate : Apply multi-purpose grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not describe on the above. JPDIA0898ZZ JPDIA0055ZZ TM-396 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] A/T SHIFT SELECTOR Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005288339 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check the A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment". ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust the A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment". CONTROL ROD TM-397 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P CONTROL ROD Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288340 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005363437 REMOVAL 1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position. 2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 3. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly. 4. Remove control rod from manual lever. 5. Remove insulator and collar from manual lever. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing collar) of the tip of the control rod. Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005288342 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment". ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment". 1. A/T assembly 2. Manual lever 3. Lock washer 4. Control rod 5. Washer 6. Insulator 7. Collar 8. Conical washer 9. Snap pin : Apply multi-purpose grease. Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above. JSDIA1002GB TM-398 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] PADDLE SHIFTER PADDLE SHIFTER Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288343 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005288344 REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-14, "A/T MODELS : Exploded View". 2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors from each paddle shifter. 3. Remove paddle shifter mounting bolts and nuts. 4. Remove each paddle shifter from steering column assembly. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. 1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up) Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA0051GB G SENSOR TM-399 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P G SENSOR Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288345 CAUTION: • Refer to TM-312, "Description" when removing or replacing G sensor. • Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact. • Never use power tool to avoid impact. Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005288346 CAUTION: • Refer to TM-312, "Description" when removing or replacing G sensor. • Never drop or strike G sensor, because it has little tolerance for impact. • Never use power tool to avoid impact. REMOVAL 1. Remove luggage floor spacer (RH). Refer to INT-30, "FOR EUROPE : Exploded View". 2. Disconnect G sensor connector. 3. Remove G sensor from bracket. 4. Remove bracket from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Install bracket with care of correct installation direction. Adjustment INFOID:0000000005288347 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Refer to TM-122, "Special Repair Requirement". 1. G sensor 2. Bracket : Vehicle front Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JSDIA0950GB TM-400 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] OIL PAN OIL PAN Exploded View INFOID:0000000005288348 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000005288349 REMOVAL 1. Drain ATF through drain plug. 2. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-10, "Exploded View". 3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A). 4. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1). 5. Remove bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-407, "Exploded View". 1. A/T assembly 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Oil pan 4. Clip 5. Oil pan mounting bolt 6. Overflow plug 7. Drain plug 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Magnet Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA0883GB : Vehicle front : Bolt SCIA8269E OIL PAN TM-401 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 6. Remove clips (1). 7. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket. 8. Remove magnets from oil pan. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the magnet, and then assembly. • Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface of transmission case and oil pan. • Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts. • Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position. • Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. In addition, install new drain plug and drain plug gasket after adjustment of A/T fluid filling. • Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in the numerical order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000005288350 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. • If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair A/ T. Refer to CO-42, "Exploded View". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for A/T fluid leakage. ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-315, "Adjustment". : Vehicle front : Oil pan mounting bolt JSDIA0793ZZ : Vehicle front JSDIA0794ZZ SCIA5199E TM-402 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] AIR BREATHER HOSE AIR BREATHER HOSE Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969940 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969941 REMOVAL 1. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-116, "VK50VE : Exploded View". 2. Remove exhaust mounting bracket and three way catalyst (right bank). Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". 3. Remove A/T air breather hose. 4. Remove propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-124, "Exploded View". 5. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-392, "Exploded View". 6. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack. 1. Air breather tube 2. Spring washer 3. A/T assembly 4. Clip 5. A/T air breather hose 6. A/T air breather tube Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA0866GB AIR BREATHER HOSE TM-403 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 7. Insert a wooden block (A) between oil pan (upper) (1) of engine and front suspension member (2). CAUTION: • Always insert a wooden block between oil pan (upper) of engine and front suspension member when removing air breather tube. (Because VVEL control shaft position sensor may be damaged by the interference between VVEL control shaft position sensor and dash panel if the operation is performed without the wooden block inserted.) • After inserting wooden block, check it does not fall out easily. 8. Remove rear engine mounting member with a power tool. Refer to EM-196, "Exploded View". 9. Remove bolt fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool. 10. Remove air breather tube. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: • Be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending the hose when installing A/T air breather hose. • Be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the spool (A) portion when inserting A/T air breather hose to the air breather tube (for A/T) (1). • Install A/T air breather hose to air breather tube (for A/T) so that the paint mark is facing upward. • Ensure clips are securely installed to brackets when installing A/T air breather hose to brackets. W : 150 mm (5.91 in) D : 30 mm (1.18 in) H : 20 mm (0.79 in) : Vehicle front JPDIA0923ZZ 2 : For transfer JPDIA0867ZZ TM-404 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] FLUID COOLER SYSTEM FLUID COOLER SYSTEM Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969942 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969943 REMOVAL 1. Shift the selector lever to “N” position, and release the parking brake. 2. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-177, "Exploded View". 3. Remove engine under cover with a power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". 4. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose A and A/T fluid cooler hose B. 5. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A). 6. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1). 7. Remove harness bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM- 407, "Exploded View". 8. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-116, "VK50VE : Exploded View". 9. Remove front drive shaft (right side). Refer to FAX-12, "Exploded View". 10. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from A/T assembly and engine assembly. 11. Plug up opening such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole. 1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube 4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. Clip 6. Bracket 7. Hose clamp 8. A/T fluid cooler hose B 9. A/T fluid cooler hose A A. To radiator Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA0855GB : Vehicle front JPDIA0902ZZ FLUID COOLER SYSTEM TM-405 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P 12. Remove clips and bracket. 13. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from the vehicle. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes. INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Never reuse copper washer. • Refer to the following when installing A/T fluid cooler hoses. *: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab. - The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends. - When installing hose clamps center line of each hose clamp tab should be positioned as shown in the figure. - Insert fluid cooler hose according to dimension “L” described below. Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp* A/T fluid cooler hose A Radiator assembly side Facing backward A A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B A/T fluid cooler hose B Radiator assembly side Facing downward C A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B D : Vehicle front E : Vehicle upper JSDIA0795ZZ (1) (2) Tube type Dimension “L” A/T fluid cooler hose A Radiator assembly side A End reaches the radius curve end. A/T fluid cooler tube side B 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (D).] A/T fluid cooler hose B Radiator assembly side C Insert the hose until the hose touches the radiator. A/T fluid cooler tube side B 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge (D).] JSDIA0882ZZ TM-406 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] FLUID COOLER SYSTEM - Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of A/T fluid cooler hoses (2) with dimension “A” from the hose edge. - Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube. Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969944 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for A/T fluid leakage. ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-315, "Adjustment". Dimension “A” : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in) SCIA8123E TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY TM-407 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY Exploded View INFOID:0000000004969945 Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004969946 REMOVAL CAUTION: • When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T assembly. • Be careful not to damage sensor edge. • Always insert a wooden block between oil pan (upper) of engine and front suspension member when removing A/T assembly from the engine. (Because VVEL control shaft position sensor may be damaged by the interference between VVEL control shaft position sensor and dash panel if the operation is performed without the wooden block inserted.) 1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then release the parking brake. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-397, "Exploded View". 4. Remove propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-124, "Exploded View". 5. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-116, "VK50VE : Exploded View". 6. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-397, "Exploded View". 7. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Refer to EM-188, "Exploded View". CAUTION: • Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it. 1. Air breather tube 2. A/T assembly 3. Bracket 4. Bracket 5. Bracket 6. Spring washer A. Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-407, "Removal and Installation". Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. JPDIA1085GB TM-408 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY • Never disassemble. • Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area. • Never place in an area affected by magnetism. 8. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-255, "Exploded View". 9. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive plate and torque converter. CAUTION: When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. 10. Remove A/T fluid cooler tube from the A/T assembly and engine. Refer to TM-404, "Exploded View". 11. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole. 12. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug when setting the transmission jack. 13. Insert a wooden block (A) between oil pan (upper) (1) of engine and front suspension member (2). CAUTION: • Always insert a wooden block between oil pan (upper) of engine and front suspension member when removing A/T assembly from the engine. (Because VVEL control shaft position sensor may be damaged by the interference between VVEL control shaft position sensor and dash panel if the operation is performed without the wooden block inserted.) • After inserting wooden block, check it does not fall out easily. 14. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer to EM-196, "Exploded View". 15. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and 4WD solenoid harness connector. 16. Remove harness and brackets. 17. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool. 18. Remove A/T air breather hose, transfer air breather hose and air breather tube. Refer to TM-402, "Exploded View" (A/T), DLN-68, "VK50VE : Removal and Installation" (transfer). 19. Remove A/T assembly with transfer assembly from vehicle. CAUTION: • Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. • Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack. 20. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly with power tool. Refer to DLN-70, "V9X (M/T) : Exploded View". INSTALLATION Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. W : 150 mm (5.91 in D : 30 mm (1.18 in) H : 20 mm (0.79 in) : Vehicle front JPDIA0923ZZ SCIA2203E TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY TM-409 < UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P • Check fitting of dowel pin ( ). • When installing A/T assembly to the engine, be sure to check dimension “A” to ensure it is within the reference value limit. • When installing A/T assembly to the engine, attach the fixing bolts in accordance with the following standard. *: Tightening the bolt with bracket of air breather tube and spring washer. • Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque. CAUTION: • When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. • When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to EM-212, "Exploded View". • Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding after converter is installed to drive plate. Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004969947 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Check A/T fluid leakage. • Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION • Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-315, "Adjustment". • Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-318, "Inspection and Adjustment". • Perform G sensor calibration when replacing A/T assembly. Refer to TM-313, "Special Repair Requirement". (Except for Russia) JPDIA0899ZZ B : Scale C : Straightedge Dimension “A” : Refer to TM-411, "Torque Converter". JPDIA0042ZZ Bolt symbol A B* C Insertion direction A/T assembly to engine Number of bolts 5 1 4 Bolt length (L) mm (in) 70 (2.76) 65 (2.56) Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 113 (12, 83) 74 (7.5, 55) JPDIA0852ZZ TM-410 < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification INFOID:0000000004969948 • *1: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". • *2: The fluid capacity is the reference value. Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000004969949 EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA Unit: km/h (MPH) • At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. FOR RUSSIA Destination For Russia Except for Russia Transmission model code number 1XR5B 1XR5D Stall torque ratio 1.93 : 1 Transmission gear ratio 1st 4.887 2nd 3.170 3rd 2.027 4th 1.412 5th 1.000 6th 0.864 7th 0.775 Reverse 4.041 Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1 Fluid capacity 11.3 liter (10 Imp qt)*2 CAUTION: • Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF. • Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty. Gear position Throttle position Full throttle Half throttle D1 → D2 50 – 54 (31 – 34) 39 – 43 (24 – 27) D2 → D3 79 – 87 (49 – 54) 57 – 65 (36 – 40) D3 → D4 126 – 136 (79 – 85) 94 – 104 (58 – 65) D4 → D5 181 – 191 (112 – 119) 138 – 148 (86 – 92) D5 → D6 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 179 – 189 (111 – 117) D6 → D7 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 250 – 260 (155 – 162) D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 155 – 165 (96 – 103) D6 → D5 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 95 – 105 (59 – 65) D5 → D4 154 – 164 (96 – 102) 66 – 76 (41 – 47) D4 → D3 103 – 113 (64 – 70) 45 – 55 (28 – 34) D3 → D2 46 – 54 (29 – 34) 12 – 20 (7 – 12) D2 → D1 16 – 20 (10 – 12) 4 – 8 (2 – 5) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) TM-411 < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)] C E F G H I J K L M A B TM N O P Unit: km/h (MPH) • At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000004969950 • At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF) • At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Stall Speed INFOID:0000000004969951 Torque Converter INFOID:0000000004969952 Gear position Throttle position Full throttle Half throttle D1 → D2 50 – 54 (31 – 34) 19 – 23 (12 – 14) D2 → D3 79 – 87 (49 – 54) 41 – 49 (25 – 30) D3 → D4 126 – 136 (79 – 85) 68 – 78 (42 – 48) D4 → D5 181 – 191 (112 – 119) 99 – 109 (62 – 68) D5 → D6 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 155 – 165 (96 – 103) D6 → D7 250 – 260 (155 – 162) 206 – 216 (128 – 134) D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 162 – 172 (101 – 107) D6 → D5 219 – 229 (136 – 142) 105 – 115 (65 – 71) D5 → D4 165 – 175 (103 – 109) 53 – 63 (32 – 39) D4 → D3 110 – 120 (68 – 75) 31 – 41 (19 – 25) D3 → D2 40 – 48 (25 – 30) 16 – 24 (10 – 15) D2 → D1 16 – 20 (10 – 12) 7 – 11 (4 – 7) Throttle position Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF Closed throttle 47 – 55 (29 – 34) 44 – 52 (27 – 32) Half throttle 60 – 68 (37 – 42) 57 – 65 (35 – 40) Stall speed 2,467 – 2,767 rpm Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 24.0 mm (0.94 in) |
